Частотный преобразователь delta c2000 инструкция

• Page 1
  5011694703 2013-04 2 C E 3…
• Page 2
  It is strictly forbidden to use steamed smoking sterilization. The warranty does not covered VFD damaged by steamed smoking sterilization. NOTE The content of this manual may be revised without prior notice. Please consult our distributors or download the most updated version at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation…

• Page 3: Table Of Contents

  Table of Contents CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION……………………1-1 ………………….1-1 1-1 Receiving and Inspection …………………….1-1 1-2 Nameplate Information 1-3 Model Name ……………………..1-1 1-4 Serial Number ……………………..1-1 1-5 RFI Jumper ………………………1-1 1-6 Dimensions ………………………1-1 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ……………………2-1 …………..1-1 2-1 Minimum Mounting Clearance and Installation …………………1-1 2-2 Minimum mounting clearance …………….1-1…

• Page 4
  ……………………..1-1 7-11 Fan Kit ……………………1-1 7-12 Flange Mounting Kit 7-13 USB/RS-485 Communication Interface IFD6530 …………..1-1 CHAPTER 8 OPTION CARDS……………………8-1 8-1 Removed key cover 8-2 Screws Speciation for option card terminals 8-3 EMC-D42A 8-4 EMC-D611A 8-5 EMC-R6AA 8-6 EMC-BPS01 8-7 EMC-PG01L 8-8 EMC-PG01O 8-9 EMC-PG01U 8-10 EMC-PG01R…
• Page 5
  CHAPTER 17 HOW TO SELECT THE RIGHT AC MOTOR DIRVE…………17-1 CHAPTER 18 SUGGESTIONS AND ERROR CORRECTIONS FOR STANDARD AC MOTOR DRIVES ……………………………18-1 CHAPTER 19 EMC STANDARD INSTALLATION GUIDE …………..19-1 Control BD V1.03; Application Keypad V1.03;…

• Page 6: Chapter 1 Introduction

  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1 Receiving and Inspection After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following: Please inspect the unit after unpacking to assure it was not damaged during shipment. Make sure that the part number printed on the package corresponds with the part number indicated on the nameplate.

• Page 7: Model Name

  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series 1-3 Model Name 1-4 Serial Number 007C43A0 T 9 30 0002 Production numb er Production we ek Production year T: Tauyuan W: Wujian S: Sha nghai Production factory 460V 3-PHASE 1HP(0.75kW) Mo del numbe r…

• Page 8: Rfi Jumper

  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series 1-5 RFI Jumper RFI Jumper: The AC motor drive may emit the electrical noise. The RFI jumper is used to suppress the interference (Radio Frequency Interference) on the power line. Frame A~C Screw Torque: 8 ~10kg-cm(6.9-8.7 lb -in.) Loosen the screws and remove the RFI-jumper.

• Page 9
  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series Frame D0~H Remove the RFI-jumper by hands, no screws need to be loosen. Main power isolated from earth: If the AC motor drive is supplied from an isolated power (IT power), the RFI jumper must be cut off. Then the RFI capacities (filter capacitors) will be disconnected from ground to prevent circuit damage (according to IEC 61800-3) and reduce earth leakage current.

• Page 10: Dimensions

  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series 1-6 Dimensions Frame A VFD007C23A; VFD007C43A/E; VFD015C23A; VFD015C43A/E; VFD022C23A; VFD022C43A/E; VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/E; VFD040C43A/E; VFD055C43A/E Unit: mm [inch] Frame Φ1 Φ2 Φ3 130.0 250.0 170.0 116.0 236.0 45.8 22.2 34.0 28.0 [5.12] [9.84] [6.69] [4.57] [9.29] [1.80] [0.24]…

• Page 11
  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series Frame B VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD075C43A/E; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/E; VFD150C43A/E See Detail A See Detail B Detail A (Mounting Hole) Detail B (Mounting Hole) Unit: mm [inch] Frame Φ1 Φ2 Φ3 190.0 320.0 190.0 173.0 303.0 77.9 22.2 34.0…
• Page 12
  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series Frame C VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD185C43A/E; VFD220C23A; VFD220C43A/E; VFD300C43A/E See Detail A See Detail B Detail A (Mounting Hole) Detail B (Mounting Hole) Unit: mm [inch] Frame Φ1 Φ2 Φ3 250.0 400.0 210.0 231.0 381.0 92.9 22.2 34.0…
• Page 13
  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series Frame D0: D0-1: VFD370C43S, VFD450C43S SEE DETAIL A SEE DETAIL B DETAIL B DETAIL A (MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE) Frame 280.0 500.0 255.0 235.0 475.0 442.0 94.2 16.0 11.0 18.0 D0-1 [11.02] [19.69] [10.04] [9.25] [18.70] [17.40]…
• Page 14
  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series Frame D0 D0-2: VFD370C43U; VFD450C43U SEE DETAIL A SEE DETAIL B DETAIL B DETAIL A (MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE) Frame Φ1 Φ2 Φ3 280.0 614.4 255.0 235.0 500.0 475.0 442.0 94.2 16.0 11.0 18.0 62.7 34.0 22.0…
• Page 15
  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series Frame D D1: VFD300C23A; VFD370C23A; VFD370C43A; VFD450C43A; VFD550C43A; VFD750C43A SEE DETAIL A SEE DETAIL B DETAIL A DETAIL B (MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE) Unit: mm [inch] Φ1 Φ2 Φ3 Frame 330.0 275.0 285.0 550.0 525.0 492.0 107.2…
• Page 16
  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series D2: VFD300C23E; VFD370C23E; VFD370C43E; VFD450C43E; VFD550C43E; VFD750C43E SEE DETAIL A SEE DETAIL B DETAIL B DETAIL A (MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE) Unit: mm [inch] Frame Φ1 Φ2 Φ3 330.0 688.3 275.0 285.0 550.0 525.0 492.0 107.2 16.0…
• Page 17
  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series Frame E E1: VFD450C23A; VFD550C23A; VFD750C23A; VFD900C43A; VFD1100C43A Unit: mm [inch] Frame S1, S2 ψ1 ψ2 ψ3 370.0 300.0 335.0 560.0 528.0 143.0 18.0 13.0 18.0 [14.57] [11.81] [13.19 [23.19] [22.05] [20.80] [5.63] [0.71] [0.51] [0.71]…
• Page 18
  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series Frame E E2: VFD450C23E; VFD550C23E; VFD750C23E; VFD900C43E; VFD1100C43E Unit: mm [inch] Frame S1, S2 ψ1 ψ2 ψ3 370.0 715.8 300.0 335.0 560.0 528.0 143.0 18.0 13.0 18.0 22.0 34.0 92.0 [14.57] [28.18] [11.81] [13.19 [23.19] [22.05] [20.80]…
• Page 19
  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series Frame F F1: VFD900C23A; VFD1320C43A; VFD1600C43A See Detail A See Detail B Detail A (Mounting Hole) Detail B (Mounting Hole) Unit: mm [inch] Frame 420.0 300.0 380.0 800.0 770.0 717.0 124.0 18.0 13.0 25.0 18.0 [16.54] [11.81]…
• Page 20
  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series Frame F F2: VFD900C23E; VFD1320C43E; VFD1600C43E See Detail A See Detail B Detail A (Mounting Hole) Detail B (Mounting Hole) Unit: mm [inch] Frame 420.0 940.0 300.0 380.0 800.0 770.0 717.0 124.0 18.0 13.0 25.0 18.0 [16.54]…
• Page 21
  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series Frame G G1: VFD1850C43A; VFD2200C43A Unit: mm [inch] Frame ψ1 ψ2 ψ3 500.0 397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0 26.5 27.0 [19.69] [15.63] [217.32] [39.37] [37.91] [35.97] [0.51] [1.04] [1.06] 1-16…
• Page 22
  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series Frame G G2: VFD1850C43E; VFD2200C43E Unit: mm [inch] Frame ψ1 ψ2 ψ3 500.0 1240.2 397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0 26.5 27.0 22.0 34.0 117.5 [19.69] [48.83] [15.63] [217.32] [39.37] [37.91] [35.97] [0.51] [1.04] [1.06] [0.87] [1.34]…
• Page 23
  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series Frame H H1: VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A; VFD4500C43A Unit: mm [inch] Frame 700.0 398.0 290.0 1346.6 1435.0 630.0 1403.0 [27.56] [56.5] [15.67] [24.8] [11.42] [55.24] [53.02] Frame ψ1 ψ2 ψ3 45.0 13.0 26.5 25.0 [1.77] [0.51] [1.04] [0.98]…
• Page 24
  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series Frame H H2: VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1; VFD4500C43E-1 Unit: mm [inch] Frame 700.0 1745.0 404.0 630.0 760.0 800.0 1729.0 500.0 630.0 1701.6 [27.56] [68.70] [15.91] [24.8] [19.69] [24.8] [29.92] [31.5] [68.07] [66.99] Frame Φ Φ Φ 51.0 38.0…
• Page 25
  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series Frame H H3: VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E; VFD4500C43E Unit: mm [inch] Frame 700.0 1745.0 404.0 630.0 760.0 800.0 1729.0 500.0 630.0 1701.6 [19.69] [24.8] [66.99] [27.56] [68.70] [15.91] [24.8] [29.92] [31.5] [68.07] Frame Φ Φ Φ 51.0 38.0…
• Page 26
  Chapter 1 IntroductionC2000 Series Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 1-21…

• Page 27: Minimum Mounting Clearance And Installation

  Chapter 2 InstallationC2000 Series Chapter 2 Installation 2-1 Minimum Mounting Clearance and Installation NOTE Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, shredded wood saw dust, metal particles, etc. from  adhereing to the heat sink Install the AC motor drive in a metal cabinet. When installing one drive below another one, …

• Page 28
  Chapter 2 InstallationC2000 Series Multiple drives, side-by-side installation (Frame D0, D, E, F) Install metal separation between the drives. Multiple drives side-by-side installation and in rows (Frame A,B,C ) Ta: Frame A~G Ta*: Frame H When installing one AC motor drive below another one (top-bottom installation), use a metal separation between the drives to prevent mutual heating.
• Page 29
  Chapter 2 InstallationC2000 Series Frame D VFD300C23A/E; VFD370C23A/E; VFD370C43A/E; VFD450C43A/E; VFD550C43A/E; VFD750C43A/E Frame E VFD450C23A/E; VFD550C23A/E; VFD750C23A/E; VFD900C43A/E; VFD1100C43A/E Frame F VFD900C23A/E; VFD1320C43A/E; VFD1600C43A/E Frame G VFD1850C43A; VFD2200C43A; VFD1850C43E; VFD2200C43E Frame H VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A; VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1;VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E NOTE 1.
• Page 30
  Chapter 2 InstallationC2000 Series Power dissipation of AC motor Air flow rate for cooling drive Flow Rate (cfm) Flow Rate (m /hr) Power Dissipation Model No. Loss External External Internal Total External Internal Total Internal Total (Heat sink) VFD022C43A/E VFD037C43A/E…

• Page 31: Derating Curve Diagram Of Normal Duty

  Chapter 2 InstallationC2000 Series 2-3 Derating Curve Diagram of Normal Duty (Pr.00-16=0)  Set Pr.06-55 = 1  Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2 (40℃: UL open-type)  Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2 (30℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size) (50℃: UL open-type)

• Page 32: Derating Curve Diagram Of Heavy Duty

  Chapter 2 InstallationC2000 Series 2-4 Derating Curve Diagram of Heavy Duty (Pr.00-16=1)  Set Pr.06-55 = 1  Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2 (40℃: UL open-type)  Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2 (30℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size) (50℃: UL open-type)

• Page 33: Unpacking

  Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Series Chapter 3 Unpacking The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to retain the warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for an extended period of time.

• Page 34
  Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Series Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Loosen the 10 screws on the pallet, remove the ready for installation. wooden plate. Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation.
• Page 35
  Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Series Remove the crate cover, EPEs and manual. Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubbers and manual. Loosen the 8 screws on the pallet as shown in the Loosen the 10 screws on the pallet and remove the following figure.
• Page 36
  Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Series Frame F Crate 1 (VFDXXXCXXA) Crate 2 (VFDXXXCXXE) Remove the 6 clips on the side of the crate with a Remove the 6 clips on the side of the crate with a flat-head screwdriver. (As shown in figure below.) flat-head screwdriver.
• Page 37
  Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Series Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation ready for installation. Frame G Crate 1 (VFDXXXCXXA) Crate 2 (VFDXXXCXXE)
• Page 38
  Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Series Loosen the 5 screws as shown in following figure: Loosen the 9 screws and remove the wooden plate. wood plate1 wood plate2 wood plate3 wood plate5 wood plate4 Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole.
• Page 39
  Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Series Remove the crate cover, EPEs and manual. Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubbers and manual. Loosen the 6 screws on the top then remove 6 Loosen the 6 screws on the top then remove 6 metal washers and 6 plastic washers as shown in metal washers and 6 plastic washers as shown in figure below.
• Page 40
  Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Series Secure the drive from the external. (Skip to the next step if this situation does not apply to you.) Loosen 8 of M8 screws on the both sides and place the 2 plates that were removed from the last step.
• Page 41
  Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Series Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubber and manual. Loosen the 6 screws on the cover, remove 6 metal washers and 6 plastic washers as shown in below: Loosen 6 of the M6 screws on the side and removes the 2 plates, as shown in following figure. The…
• Page 42
  Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Series Secure the drive from the internal. Secure the drive from the external. Loosen 18 of the M6 screws and remove the top Loosen 8 of the M8 screws on the both sides and cover as shown in figure 2. Mount the cover (figure…
• Page 43
  Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Series Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation. Frame H Secure the drive (VFDXXXC43A) Screw: M12*6 Torque: 340-420kg-cm [295.1-364.6lb-in.] 3-11…
• Page 44
  Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Series (VFDXXXC43E) & (VFDXXXC43E-1) Secure the drive from the internal. Screw: M12*8 Torque: 340-420kg-cm [295.1-364.6lb-in.] Secure the drive from the external. Screw: M12*8 Torque: 340-420kg-cm [295.1-364.6lb-in.] 3-12…

• Page 45: The Lifting Hook

  Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Series 3-2 The Lifting Hook The arrows indicate the location of the lifting holes of frame D to H, as shown in figure below: Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 3-13…

• Page 46
  Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Series Ensure the lifting hook properly goes through the Ensure the angle between the lifting holes and the lifting hole, as shown in the following diagram. lifting device is within the specification, as shown (Applicable to Frame D~E) in the following figure.
• Page 47
  Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Series Weight VFDXXXXCXXA VFDXXXXCXXE 37.6 kg(82.9 Ibs.) 40 kg(88.2 Ibs.) VFDXXXXCXXA VFDXXXXCXXE 63.6 kg(140.2 Ibs.) 66 kg(145.5 Ibs.) 85kg(187.2 Ibs.) VFDXXXXCXXA 88kg(193.8 Ibs.) VFDXXXXCXXE VFDXXXXCXXA 130kg(286.5 Ibs.) VFDXXXXCXXE 138kg(303.9 lbs) VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A; VFD4500C43A 235kg (518.1lbs) H2: VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1; VFD4500C43E-1 257kg (566.6lbs)
• Page 48
  Chapter 3 UnpackingC2000 Series H3: VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E; VFD4500C43E 263kg (579.8lbs) 3-16…
• Page 49
  Chapter 4 WiringC2000 Series Chapter 4 Wiring After removing the front cover, examine if the power and control terminals are clearly noted. Please read following precautions before wiring.  Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 terminals. Failure to comply may result in damage to the equipments.
• Page 50
  Chapter 4 WiringC2000 Series SGND…
• Page 51
  Chapter 4 WiringC2000 Series * It provides 3-phase power Please refer to figure 3 -/DC- +/D C+ Fuse/NFB( No Fuse Breaker) R(L1) R(L1) Motor U(T1) S(L2) S(L2) V(T2) T(L3) T(L3) W(T3) RB 1 RC 1 +24V Factory setting: NPN (SINK) Mode Multi-function output terminals 250 Vac/5A (N.O.)
• Page 52
  Chapter 4 WiringC2000 Series Figure 1 Power VFD-C2000 Motor Drive Power Adaptor R/L11 S/L12 T/L13 R/L21 S/L22 T/L23 Figure 2 SINK（NPN）/SOURCE（PNP）Mode Sink Mode Sourc e Mode w ith internal power (+24VD C) with internal power (+24VDC ) +2 4V internal c irc ui t…
• Page 53
  NOTE Common DC Bus can only be applied to the drives with same power range. If in your case the drives are in different power range, please contact with us (Delta Industrial Automation Business Unit).

• Page 54: Main Circuit Diagram

  Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Series Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals 5-1 Main Circuit Diagram For frame A~C Brake resis tor (optio nal) * Provid e 3-ph ase inpu t power Jumper Fus e/NFB(No F use Bre aker) R(L1) U(T1)

• Page 55
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Series Power VFD-C2000 Motor Drive Power Adaptor R/L11 S/L12 T/L13 R/L21 S/L22 T/L23 Terminals Descriptions R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input terminals 3-phase U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase induction motor…
• Page 56
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Series  Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the two ends of the shield wire or tube.  Do NOT run/stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON/OFF. Run/stop AC motor drives by RUN/STOP command via control terminals or keypad.
• Page 57
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Series  For those models without built-in braking chopper, please connect external brake unit and brake resistor (both of them are optional) to increase brake torque.  When the terminals +1, +2 and — are not used, please leave the terminals open.
• Page 58
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Series 5-2 Main Circuit Terminals Frame A Main circuit terminals: R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , B1, B2, +1, +2, — Max. Wire Torque Models Min. Wire Gauge Gauge (±10%) VFD007C23A 14 AWG (2.1mm VFD015C23A 12 AWG (3.3mm…
• Page 59
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Series Frame B Main circuit terminals: R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , B1, B2, +1, +2, — Max. Wire Torque Models Min. Wire Gauge Gauge (±10%) VFD055C23A 8 AWG (8.4mm VFD075C23A 6 AWG (13.3mm VFD110C23A 4 AWG (21.2mm…
• Page 60
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Series Frame C Main circuit terminals: R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , B1, B2, +1, +2, — Max. Wire Torque Models Min. Wire Gauge Gauge (±10%) VFD150C23A 1 AWG (42.4mm VFD185C23A 1/0 AWG (53.5mm VFD220C23A 1/0 AWG (53.5mm…
• Page 61
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Series Frame D0 Main circuit terminals： R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , +1/DC+, -/DC- Max. Wire Torque Models Min. Wire Gauge Gauge (±10%) VFD370C43S 1/0 AWG (53.5mm VFD450C43S 2/0 AWG 2/0 AWG (67.4mm 80kg-cm (67.4mm…
• Page 62
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Series Frame D Main circuit terminals: R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , +1/DC+, -/DC- Max. Wire Torque Models Min. Wire Gauge Gauge (±10%) VFD300C23A 4/0 AWG (107mm VFD370C23A 250MCM (127mm VFD370C43A 300MCM 1/0 AWG (53.5mm…
• Page 63
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Series Frame E Main circuit terminals: R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , +1/DC+, -/DC- Max. Wire Torque Models Min. Wire Gauge Gauge (±10%) VFD450C23A 1/0AWG*2 (53.5mm VFD550C23A 3/0AWG*2 (85mm 300MCM*2 VFD750C23A 4/0 AWG*2 (107mm…
• Page 64
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Series Frame F Main circuit terminals: R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, -/DC- Max. Wire Torque Models Min. Wire Gauge Gauge (±10%) VFD900C23A 300MCM*2 (152mm 300MCM*2 VFD1320C43A 4/0 AWG*2 (107mm (152mm VFD1600C43A 300MCM*2 (152mm 200kg-cm (173 lb-in.)
• Page 65
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Series Frame G Main circuit terminals: R/L11, R/L12, S/L21, S/L22, T/L31, T/L32 Max. Wire Torque Models Min. Wire Gauge Gauge (±10%) VFD1850C43A 2/0AWG*4 (67.4mm VFD2200C43A 3/0AWG*4 (85mm 300MCM*4 200kg-cm (152mm (173 lb-in.) VFD1850C43E 1/0AWG*4 (53.5mm (19.62Nm)
• Page 66
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsC2000 Series Frame H Main circuit terminals: R/11,R12,S/21,S/22,T/31,T/32, V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, U/T1, -/DC- Max. Wire Torque Models Min. Wire Gauge Gauge (±10%) VFD2800C43A 4/0 AWG*4 (107mm VFD3150C43A 300MCM*4 (152mm VFD3550C43A 300MCM*4 (152mm VFD4500C43A 300MCM*4 (152mm VFD2800C43E-1…
• Page 67
  Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000 Series Chapter 6 Control Terminals Please remove the top cover before wiring the multi-function input and output terminals, The drive appearances shown in the figures are for reference only, a real drive may look different. Remove the cover for wiring. Frame A~H Frame A&B…
• Page 68
  Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000 Series Frame G Screw torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.] To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward Frame H Screw torque: 14~16Kg-cm [12.15~13.89lb-in.] To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward…

• Page 69: Specifications Of Control Terminal

  Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000 Series 6-1 Specifications of Control Terminal 0-10V 0-20mA Open 0-10V 0-10V RC2 RB2 AFM1 AFM2 -10-10V 0-20mA 0-10V 0-20mA AFM1 +10V AVI +24V COM FWD MO2 MCM SGND AFM2 -10V AUI SCM DFM DCM REV MI2 Removable Terminal Block Wire Gauge: 26~16AWG（0.1281-1.318mm…

• Page 70
  Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000 Series Terminals Terminal Function Factory Setting (NPN mode) Multi-function Output 2 (photocoupler) Max 48Vdc 50mA Multi-function Output Common Multi-function relay output 1 Resistive Load: (N.O.) a 5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 250VAC Multi-function relay output 1 5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 30VDC (N.C.) b Inductive Load (COS 0.4):…

• Page 71: Analog Input Terminals (Avi, Aci, Aui, Acm)

  Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000 Series Terminals Terminal Function Factory Setting (NPN mode) frequency Range: 0~10V  -10~+10V AFM 1 Switch, factory setting is 0~10V 0~10V Max. output current 2mA, Max. load 5kΩ 0~20mA Max. load 500Ω Output current: 20mA max AFM2 Resolution: 0~10V corresponds to Max.

• Page 72: Remove The Terminal Block

  Chapter 6 Control TerminalsC2000 Series 6-3 Remove the Terminal Block 1. Loosen the screws by screwdriver. (As shown in figure below). 2. Remove the control board by pulling it out for a distance 6~8 cm (as 1 in the figure) then lift the control…

• Page 73: All Brake Resistors And Brake Units Used In Ac Motor Drives

  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series Chapter 7 Optional Accessories The optional accessories listed in this chapter are available upon request. Installing additional accessories to your drive would substantially improves the drive’s performance. Please select an applicable accessory according to your need or contact the local distributor for suggestion.

• Page 74
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series 460V Applicable 125%Braking Torque 10%ED Max. Brake Torque Motor Braking Resistor Total Min. Max. Total Peak Torque Brake Braking Resistor series for value spec. HP kW Braking Resistor Braking Power (kg-m) Unit each Brake Unit…
• Page 75
  If damage to the drive or other equipment is due to the fact that the brake resistors and brake modules in use are not provided by Delta, the warranty will be void. Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors. If the minimum resistance value is to be utilized, consult local dealers for the calculation of Watt figures.

• Page 76: Non-Fuse Circuit Breaker

  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series 7-2 Non-fuse Circuit Breaker Comply with UL standard: Per UL 508, paragraph 45.8.4, part a, The rated current of the breaker shall be 2~4 times of the maximum rated input current of AC motor drive.

• Page 77
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series 7-3 Fuse Specification Chart  Use only the fuses comply with UL certificated.  Use only the fuses comply with local regulations. Line Fuse Input Current I(A) 230V Model Heavy Duty Normal Duty I (A)

• Page 78: Ac Reactor

  0.290 0.483 0.232 0.387 0.192 0.320 0.141 0.235 0.117 0.196 0.096 0.160 0.081 0.135 0.068 0.114 0.057 0.095 0.046 0.077 1100 0.038 0.064 1232 0.034 0.057 1366 0.031 0.052 ＊ Please contact Delta for VFD4500C43A/E Lin & Load AC Reactor…

• Page 79: Zero Phase Reactor

  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series 7-5 Zero Phase Reactors (Chokes) RF220X00A UNIT: mm (inch) Diagram A Recommended Cable Wind each wire around the core for 4 times. The reactor Wire Size (mm Wiring type Qty. must be placed at the AC motor drive output side as…

• Page 80: Dc Reactor

  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series 7-6 DC Reactors (Chokes) 230V DC Choke Input Voltage Nominal Saturation Inductance 3% Inductance 5% （mh） （mh） Amperes (rms) Current (rms) 0.75 5.65 11.3 3.660 6.10 9.04 18.08 2.288 3.81 12.43 24.86 1.664 2.77 19.21…

• Page 81: Emi Filter

  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series 7-7 EMI Filter Applicable Model Reference Website EMI Filter VFD007C23A; http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/products/industrial_emc_filters/kmfa_three_phase_indu VFD015C23A; KMF325A strial_mains_filters_high_performance/ VFD022C23A; VFD037C23A; KMF325A Three Phase Industrial Mains Filters — High Performance 25 Amps http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/products/industrial_emc_filters/kmfa_three_phase_indu VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; KMF370A strial_mains_filters_high_performance/ VFD110C23A; KMF370A Three Phase Industrial Mains Filters — High Performance 70 Amps http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/products/industrial_emc_filters/kmfa_three_phase_indu…

• Page 82
  All electrical equipment, including AC motor drives, will generate high-frequency/low-frequency noise and will interfere with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction when in operation. By using an EMI filter with correct installation, much interference can be eliminated. It is recommended to use DELTA EMI filter to have the best interference elimination performance.
• Page 83
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series Saddle on both ends Saddle on one end Figure 2 The length of motor cable 1. Cable length suggestion for Drive in full load a. Non-shielded cables: For 5.5kW(7.5HP) model and below, max. cable length between the drive and motor is 328ft (100m).

• Page 84: Digital Keypad

  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series 7-8 Digital Keypad 7-8-1 KPC-CE01 : LED Disp lay D ispla y freq uen cy, cu rre nt, vo ltag e and erro r etc. : Status Indi cator F: Fre que ncy C omma nd…

• Page 85
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series 7-8-2 Dimension 7-8-3 RJ45 Extension Lead for Digital Keypad Part # Description CBC-K3FT 3 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 0.9m) CBC-K5FT 5 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 1.5 m) CBC-K7FT 7 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 2.1 m)

• Page 86: Panel Mounting

  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series 7-9 Panel Mounting (MKC-KPPK) For MKC-KPPK model, user can choose wall mounting or embedded mounting, protection level is IP56. Applicable to the digital keypads (KPC-CC01 & KPC-CE01). Wall Mounting Embedded Mounting accessories*1 accessories*2 Screw *4 ~M4*p 0.7 *L8mm Screw *4 ~M4*p 0.7 *L8mm…

• Page 87
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series 7-15…

• Page 88: Conduit Box Kit

  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series 7-10 Conduit Box Kit Appearance  Frame D Frame E Applicable models Applicable models VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E;VFD370C43A/43E; VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E; VFD750C23A/23E; VFD450C43A/43E; VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E Model number『MKC-DN1CB』 Model number『MKC-EN1CB』 ITEM Description Qty. ITEM Description Qty.

• Page 89
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series Conduit Box Installation  Frame D Loosen the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 10~12kg-cm (8.66~10.39Ib-in) Remove the 5 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
• Page 90
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series Frame E 1. Loosen the 4 cover screws and lift the cover; Screw torque: 12~ 15 kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in). 2. Fasten the 6 screws shown in the following figure and place the cover back to the original position. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
• Page 91
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series Frame F Loosen the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 14~16kg-cm (12.2~13.9Ib-in). Install the conduit box by fastens the 4 screws, as shown in the following figure.
• Page 92
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series Frame G On the conduit box, loosen 7 of the cover screws and remove the cover. On the drive, loosen 4 of the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the following figure.
• Page 93
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series Fasten all the screws. Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (20.8~30Ib-in). Place the cover back to the top and fasten the screws (as shown in the figure). Screw torque: 12~15kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in). 7-21…
• Page 94
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series 7-11 Fan Kit Frames of the fan kit  Frame A Model『MKC-AFKM』 Applicable Model VFD015C23A; VFD022C23A; VFD037C23A;VFD022C43A/43E; VFD037C43A/43E;VFD040C43A/43E; VFD055C43A/43E Frame B Model『MKC-BFKM1』 Applicable Model VFD055C23A; VFD075C43A/43E Frame B Model 『MKC-BFKM2』 Applicable Model VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/43E;…
• Page 95
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series Frame C Model 『MKC-CFKB2』 Applicable Model VFD185C43A/43E; VFD220C43A/43E;VFD300C43A/43E Frame D0 Model『MKC-D0FKM』 Model 『MKC-DFKB』 Applicable Model VFD370C43S/43U; VFD450C43S/43U; Frame D Model 『MKC-DFKM』 Model 『MKC-DFKB』 Applicable Model VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E; VFD370C43A/43E; VFD450C43A/43E; VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E Frame E Model 『MKC-EFKM1』…
• Page 96
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series Frame E Model 『MKC-EFKB』 Applicable Model VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E; VFD750C23A/23E; VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E Frame F Model 『MKC-FFKM』 Applicable Model VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E; VFD1600C43A/43E Frame F Model 『MKC-FFKB』 Applicable Model VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E; VFD1600C43A/43E Frame G Model 『MKC-GFKM』 Applicable Model VFD1850C43A/43E;…
• Page 97
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series Frame H Model 『MKC-HFKM』 Applicable Model VFD2800C43A/43E; VFD3150C43A/43E; VFD3550C43A/43E; VFD4500C43A/43E ;VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1; VFD4500C43E-1 7-25…
• Page 98
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series Fan Removal  Frame A Applicable model VFD015C23A; VFD022C23A; VFD022C43A/43E; VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/43E; VFD040C43A/43E; VFD055C43A/43E Press the tabs on both side of the fan to successfully Disconnect the power terminal before removing the fan. remove the fan. (The arrow) (As shown below.)
• Page 99
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series Frame C Applicable model Single fan applicable model: VFD185C43A/E; VFD220C43A/E; VFD300C43A Dual fans applicable model: VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD220C23A; VFD300C43E Step 1. (Figure 1) Use slotted screwdriver to remove cover Figure 1 Disconnect the fan power Step 2.
• Page 100
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series (Figure 1) Loosen screw 1 and 2, press the on the right (Figure 2) Loosen screw 3, press the tab on the right and and the left to remove the cover, follow the direction the the left to remove the cover.
• Page 101
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series (Figure 1) Loosen screw 1 and screw 2, press the on the (Figure 2) Loosen screw 3 and screw 4, press the tab on right and the left to remove the cover, follow the direction the right and the left to remove the cover.
• Page 102
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series Loosen screw 1 and screw 2 (as shown in the figure below), and disconnect fan power before removing the fan. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~25.6in-lbf). Frame F Applicable model VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E; VFD1600C43A/43E; Fan model『MKC-FFKM』 Loosen the screws and removes the fan (as shown in figure below). Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in』…
• Page 103
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series (3) Loosen the screws and remove the fan. (As shown in the figure below) Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in). Frame G Applicable model VFD1800C43A/43E; VFD2200C43A/43E; (2) For 1~8 shown in the figure: Loosen the screws Fan model『MKC-GFKM』…
• Page 104
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series Frame H Applicable model VFD2800C43A/43E; VFD3150C43A/43E; VFD3550C43A/43E; VFD4500C43A/43E (2) Loosen the screw and remove the top cover. Fan model 『MKC-HFKM』 Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in). (1) Loosen the screw and remove the top cover. Screw torque: 14~16kg-cm (12.2~13.9Ib-in) (3) Disconnect the fan.
• Page 105
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series 7-12 Flange Mounting Kit Applicable Models, Frame A~F Frame A 『MKC-AFM1』 Applicable model VFD015C23A; VFD022C23A; VFD022C43A/43E Screw 1 *4 M3*P 0.5; L=6mm Screw 2*8 M6*P 1.0; L=16mm Accessories 1*1 Accessories 2*2 Accessories 3*2 『MKC-AFM』 Applicable model VFD007C23A;…
• Page 106
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series 『MKC-AFM1』Installation Install accessory 1 by fastening 4 of the screw 1(M3). Screw torque: 6~8kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in). Install accessory 2&3 by fastening 2 of the screw 2(M6). Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in). Install accessory 2&3 by fastening 2 of the screw 2(M6). Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in).
• Page 107
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series 『MKC-AFM』 Installation Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 2 of the screw 1(M3). Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in). (As shown in following figure) Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 2 of the screw 1(M3). Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in).
• Page 108
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series Frame B 『MKC-BFM』 Applicable model VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A; VFD075C43A/43E; VFD110C43A/43E; VFD150C43A/43E Screw 1 *4 ~ M8*P 1.25; Screw 2*6 ~ M6*P 1.0; Accessories 1*2 Accessories 2*2 Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] 7-36…
• Page 109
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series 『MKC-BFM』Installation Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 4 of the screw 1(M8). Screw torque: 40~45kg-cm (34.7~39.0Ib-in). (As shown in the following figure) Plate installation, place 6 of the screw 2 (M6) through accessory 1&2 and the plate then fasten the screws.
• Page 110
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series Frame C 『MKC-CFM』 Applicable model VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD220C23A; VFD185C43A/43E; VFD220C43A/43E; VFD300C43A/43E Screw 1*4 ~ M8*P 1.25; Screw 2*8 ~ M6*P 1.0; Accessories 1*2 Accessories 2*2 Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] 7-38…
• Page 111
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series 『MKC-CFM』Installation Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 4 of the screw 1(M8). Screw torque: 50~55kg-cm (43.4~47.7Ib-in). (As shown in the following figure) Plate installation, place 8 of the screw 2 (M6) through accessories 1&2 and the plate then fasten the screws.
• Page 112
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series Frame D Applicable model VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E; VFD370C43A/43E; VFD450C43A/43E; VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] M10*P1.5(4X) 11.0[0.43](4X) 7-40…
• Page 113
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series Frame D0&D&E 1. Loosen 8 screws and remove Fixture 2 (as shown in 2. Loosen 10 screws and remove Fixture 1 (as shown the following figure). in the following figure). 3. Fasten 4 screws (as shown in the following figure).
• Page 114
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series Frame E Applicable model VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E; VFD750C23A/23E; VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] 7-42…
• Page 115
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series Frame F Applicable model VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E; VFD1600C43A/43E Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] 7-43…
• Page 116
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series Frame F 1. Loosen 12 screws and remove Fixture 2. 2. Loosen 12 screws and remove Fixture 2. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in). FIXTURE 2 FIXTURE2 3. Loosen screw 13 ~26 and remove Fixture 1.
• Page 117
  RJ-45 in RS-485 connector for users to wire conveniently. And its tiny dimension, handy use of plug-and-play and hot-swap provide more conveniences for connecting all DELTA IABU products to your PC. Applicable Models: All DELTA IABU products.
• Page 118
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series  RJ-45 Description Description Reserved Reserved Reserved 3. Preparations before Driver Installation Please extract the driver file (IFD6530_Drivers.exe) by following steps. You could find driver file (IFD6530_Drivers.exe) in the CD supplied with IFD6530. Note: DO NOT connect IFD6530 to PC before extracting the driver file.
• Page 119
  Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesC2000 Series 4. Driver Installation After connecting IFD6530 to PC, please install driver by following steps. 7-47…
• Page 120
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories C2000 Series 5. LED Display 1. Steady Green LED ON: power is ON. 2. Blinking orange LED: data is transmitting. 7-48…
• Page 121
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series Chapter 8 Option Cards Please select applicable option cards for your drive or contact local distributor for suggestion. To prevent drive damage during installation, please removes the digital keypad and the cover before wiring. Refer to the following instruction.
• Page 122
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series Frame F Screw Torque: 12~ 15 Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.] Frame G Screw Torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.] Frame H Screw Torque: 14~16Kg-cm [12.15~13.89lb-in.]…
• Page 123
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series RJ45 (Socket) for digital keypad KPC-CC01; KPC-CE01 Please refer to CH10 Digital Keypad for more details on KPC-CE01. Please refer to CH10 Digital Keypad for more details on optional accessory RJ45 extension cable. Slot 3 2 Communication extension card (Slot 1) CMC-MOD01;…
• Page 124
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series 8-3 EMC-D42A Terminals Descriptions Common for Multi-function input terminals Select SINK （NPN） /SOURCE （PNP） in J1 jumper / external power supply Refer to parameters 02-26~02-29 to program the multi-function inputs MI10~MI13. Internal power is applied from terminal E24: +24Vdc±5% 200mA, MI10~ MI13 External power +24VDC: max.
• Page 125
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series 8-6 EMC-BPS01 Terminals Descriptions Input power: 24V±5% Maximum input current:0.5A External Power Note: Supply 1) Do not connect control terminal +24V (Digital control signal common: SOURCE) directly to the EMC-BPS01input terminal 24V. 2) Do not connect control terminal GND directly to the EMC-BPS01 input…
• Page 126
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series 8-7 EMC-PG01L  Terminal description Set by Pr.10-00~10-02 Terminals Descriptions Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V5% (use FSW3 to switch +5V/+12V) Max. output current: 200mA Common for power and signal Encoder input signal (Line Driver) A1, /A1, B1, /B1, Z1, /Z1 It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
• Page 127
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series  Wiring Diagram  Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above). Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm (AWG24 to AWG18).
• Page 128
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series 8-8 EMC-PG01O  Terminal descriptions Set by Pr.10-00~10-02 Terminals Descriptions Output voltage for power +5V/+12V5% (use FSW3 to switch +5V/+12V) Max. output current: 200mA Common for power and signal Encoder Input signal (Line Driver or Open Collector)
• Page 129
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series PG2 Wiring Diagram Ext Power (5-24V) Ext Pull high RES 4.7kΩ Ext Ground  Wiring Diagram  Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above).
• Page 130
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series 8-9 EMC-PG01U  FJMP1 S: Standard UVW Output Encoder; D: Delta Encoder  Set by Pr.10-00~10-02 Terminals Descriptions Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V5% (use FSW3 to switch +5V/+12V) Max. output current: 200mA Common for power and signal…
• Page 131
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series  Wiring Diagram  Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above). Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm (AWG24 to AWG18).
• Page 132
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series 8-10 EMC-PG01R  Terminal Descriptions Set by Pr.10-00~10-02 Terminals Descriptions Resolver Output Power R1- R2 7Vrms, 10kHz Resolver Input Signal S1,S2, S3, S4, 3.5±0.175Vrms, 10kHz Pulse Input signal (Line Driver or Open Collector) A2, /A2,…
• Page 133
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series  Wiring Diagram  Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above). Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm (AWG24 to AWG18).
• Page 134
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series 8-11 CMC-MOD01  Features Supports Modbus TCP protocol MDI/MDI-X auto-detect Baud rate: 10/100Mbps auto-detect E-mail alarm AC motor drive keypad/Ethernet configuration Virtual serial port.  Product File  I/O CARD & Relay Card …
• Page 135
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series Environment ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2) EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4) Noise immunity Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-5) Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-6) Operation: -10°C ~ 50°C (temperature), 90% (humidity) Operation/storage Storage: -25°C ~ 70°C (temperature), 95% (humidity)
• Page 136
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series  Communication Parameters for VFD-C2000 Connected to Ethernet When VFD-C2000 is link to Ethernet, please set up the communication parameters base on the table below. Ethernet master will be able to read/write the frequency word and control word of VFD-C2000 after communication parameters setup.
• Page 137
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series  Basic Registers Content Explanation Model name Set up by the system; read only. The model code of CMC-MOD01=H’0203 Firmware Displaying the current firmware version in hex, e.g. H’0100 indicates the version firmware version V1.00.
• Page 138
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series Abnormality Cause How to correct it? Incorrect network setting in Check if the network setting for CMC-MOD01 is CMC-MOD01 correct. Fail to send e-mail Incorrect mail server setting Please confirm the IP address for SMTP-Server.
• Page 139
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series 8-12 CMC-PD01  Features Supports PZD control data exchange. Supports PKW polling AC motor drive parameters. Supports user diagnosis function. Auto-detects baud rates; supports Max. 12Mbps.  Product Profile 1. NET indicator 2. POWER indicator 3.
• Page 140
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series Environment ESD(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-2) EFT(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-4) Noise immunity Surge Teat(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-5) Conducted Susceptibility Test(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-6) Operation: -10ºC ~ 50ºC (temperature), 90% (humidity) Operation /storage Storage: -25ºC ~ 70ºC (temperature), 95% (humidity) Shock / vibration International standards: IEC61131-2, IEC68-2-6 (TEST Fc)/IEC61131-2 &…
• Page 141
  8-13 CMC-DN01  Functions Based on the high-speed communication interface of Delta HSSP protocol, able to conduct immediate control to AC motor drive. Supports Group 2 only connection and polling I/O data exchange. For I/O mapping, supports Max. 32 words of input and 32 words of output.
• Page 142
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series Electrical Specification Power supply voltage 5VDC (supplied by AC motor drive) Insulation voltage 500VDC Communication wire 0.85W power consumption Power consumption Weight Environment ESD (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-2) EFT (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-4) Noise immunity Surge Teat(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-5) Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-6) Operation: -10ºC ~ 50ºC (temperature), 90% (humidity)
• Page 143
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series NS LED LED status Indication How to correct it? 1. Check the power of CMC-DN01 and see if the connection is normal. No power supply or CMC-DN01 has 2. Make sure at least one or more nodes are on the not completed MAC ID test yet.
• Page 144
  1 Port Transmission method IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u Transmission cable Category 5e shielding 100M Transmission speed 10/100 Mbps Auto-Detect ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, MODBUS OVER TCP/IP, EtherNet/IP, Delta Network protocol Configuration Electrical Specification Weight Insulation voltage 500VDC Power consumption 0.8W…
• Page 145
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series Environment ESD (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-2) EFT (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-4) Noise immunity Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-5) Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-6) Operation: -10°C ~ 50°C (temperature), 90% (humidity) Operation/storage Storage: -25°C ~ 70°C (temperature), 95% (humidity)
• Page 146
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1 [Figure 3] [Figure 4] [Figure 5]  Communication Parameters for VFD-C2000 Connected to Ethernet When VFD-C2000 is connected to Ethernet network, please set up the communication parameters for it according to the table below. The Ethernet master is only able to read/write the frequency word and control word of VFD-C2000 after the communication parameters are set.
• Page 147
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series  Disconnecting CMC- EIP01 from VFD-C2000 1. Switch off the power supply of VFD-C2000. 2. Remove the two screws (see Figure 6). 3. Twist opens the card clip and inserts the slot type screwdriver to the hollow to prize the PCB off the card clip (see Figure 7).
• Page 148
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards C2000 Series Abnormality Cause How to correct it? Poor contact to RJ-45 Make sure RJ-45 connector is connected to connector Ethernet port. CMC-EIP01 not connected to Make sure CMC-EIP01 is connected to network. network No communication…
• Page 149
  19  0.4 39  0.4 TAP-CB10 1000 10 CANopen Dimension  Model: TAP-CN03 NOTE For more information on CANopen, please refer to Chapter 15 CANopen Overview or CANopen user manual can also be downloaded on Delta website: http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/ 8-29…
• Page 150
  Chapter 9 Specifications C2000 Series Chapter 9 Specification 9-1 230V Series Frame Size Model VFD-_ _ _C_ _ Power of corresponding heavy duty 0.75 18.5 motor (kW) Power of corrsponding normal duty 0.75 18.5 motor (kW) Rated Output Capacity (kVA)
• Page 151
  Chapter 9 Specifications C2000 Series DC reactor Frame A to C (optional); Frame D and above (built-in) EMI Filter Frame A to C (optional); Frame D and above (optional) EMC-COP01 VFDXXC23A (optional); VFDXXXC23E (built-in)
• Page 152
  Chapter 9 Specifications C2000 Series 9-2 460V Series Frame Size Model VFD-_ _ _C_ _ Power of corresponding heavy 0.75 18.5 duty motor (kW) Power of corrsponding normal 0.75 18.5 duty motor (kW) Rated Output Capacity (kVA) Rated Output Current (A)
• Page 153
  Chapter 9 Specifications C2000 Series VFDXXXC43A: No EMI Filter; EMI Filter VFDXXXC43E: Built-in EMI Filter VFDXXXC43A/43E Frame D and above: EMI Filter is optional EMC-COP01 VFDXXC43A (optional); VFDXXXC43E (built-in) NOTE  For FRAME A, B and C, Model VFDXXXC43A the enclosure type is IP20/NEMA1/UL TYPE1.
• Page 154
  Chapter 9 Specifications C2000 Series 9-3 Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation DO NOT expose the AC motor drive in the bad environment, such as dust, direct sunlight, corrosive/inflammable gasses, humidity, liquid and vibration environment. The salt in the air must be less than 0.01mg/cm every year.
• Page 155
  Chapter 9 Specifications C2000 Series 9-4 Specification for Operation Temperature and Protection Level Operation Model Frame Top cover Conduit Box Protection Level Temperature Frame A~C Top cover -10~50℃ IP20/UL Open Type 230V: Removed Standard 0.75~22kW Standard conduit plate 460V: -10~40℃…
• Page 156
  Chapter 9 Specifications C2000 Series C Type Derating for Altitude Ta at Rating= 100% Rating (%) at Stardard Ambient Temperature* 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 Altitude (m) * Stardard Ambient Temperature= 50 degC for UL Open Type / IP20 Stardard Ambient Temperature= 40 degC for UL Type I /IP 20 & UL Open Type / IP20 Side by Side…
• Page 157
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad C2000 Chapter 10 Digital Keypad 10-1 Descriptions of Digital Keypad 10-2 Function of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 10-3 TPEditor Installation Instruction 10-4 Fault Code Description of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 10-1 Descriptions of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 KPC-CE01(Option) Communication Interface RJ-45 (socket)、RS-485 interface;…
• Page 158
  Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Series Press menu to return to main menu. Menu content: KPC-CE01 does not support function 5 ~13. 1. Detail Parameter 7. Quick/Simple Setup 13. PC Link 2. Copy Parameter 8. Display Setup 3. Keypad Locked 9. Time Setup 4.
• Page 159
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad C2000 RUN LED: Condition/State status CANopen at initial No LED Blinking CANopen at pre-operation CANopen ~”RUN” Single CANopen at stopped flash CANopen at operation status No LED ERR LED: Condition/ State status No Error Single One message fail flash Double Guarding fail or heartbeat fail…
• Page 160
  Startup page can only display pictures, no flash. When Power ON, it will display startup page then the main page. The main page displays Delta’s default setting F/H/A/U, the display order can be set by Pr.00.03 (Startup display). When the selected item is U page, use left key and right key to switch between the items, the display order of U page is set by Pr.00.04 (User display).
• Page 161
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad C2000 Display Icon Start-up : prese nt se tting 1.Default 1 : roll down the page for more options 2.Default 2 3.User define Press for more options. Pr setup : show complete se ntence 00:System Pr Press for complete information 01:Basic…
• Page 162
  Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Series Copy Parameter Copy parameters (Pr) Copy pr 4 sets of parameters duplication. When the setting is complete, the date will be written to the copy parameters (Pr) page. Copy pr 1.2009/05/04 Press ENTER File 1 1.SAVE…
• Page 163
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad C2000 Copy PLC Copy PLC Copy PLC Duplicate 4 sets of parameters. When the setting is complete, the date will be written to the Copy PLC page. Copy PLC 1.2010/03/14 Press ENTER to s etting me nu. File 1 Press to s ele ct where to save the file…
• Page 164
  Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Series Quick/Simple Setting Quick Setting: Quick setting 1. V/F Mode 1: V/F mode 01: Password Input (Decode) 2: VFPG mode 00-07 V/F mode P00-07 3: SVC mode 01. Password Input 02. Password Setting Password Input 03. Control Mode Press to select.
• Page 165
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad C2000 8. Stop Method (P00-22) 9. Digital Keypad STOP function (P00-32) 10. Max. Operation Frequency (P01-00) 11. Base Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-01) 12. Max. Output Voltage Setting of Motor 1 (P01-02) 13. Min. Output Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-07) 14.
• Page 166
  Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Series 29. Emergency Stop (EF) & Force to Stop Selection (P07-20) 30. Filter Time of Torque Command (P07-24) 31. Filter Time of Slip Compensation (P07-25) 32. Slip Compensation Gain (P07-27) FOCPG Mode 01: Password Input (Decode)
• Page 167
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad C2000 6. Source of the Operation Command (P00-21) 7. Max. Operation Frequency (P01-00) 8. Base Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-01) 9. Max. Output Voltage Setting of Motor 1 (P01-02) 10. Full-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (P05-01) 11.
• Page 168
  Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Series Display setup 1. Contrast Adjustment Disp setup Contrast adjust 1.Contrast Ad Adjust setting value 2.BKLT time 2. Back-lighted Time BKLT Time Press ENTER Adjust setting value enter the setting menu. Time setting Enter time setup page, «9» will continue to blink…
• Page 169
  Please refer to Chapter 07 Optional Acessories for more detail. TPEditor TPEditor Installation Instruction is on page 10-15 and TPEditor V1.30.6 is available for download at: http://www.delta.com.tw/ch/product/em/download/download_main.asp?act =3&pid=1&cid=1&tpid=3 13. PC Link The function of PC Link is to establish a connection with computer to download the page for user defined editing.
• Page 170
  Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Series Other display When fault occur, the menu will display: Fault Warning CE01 Oc at accel Comm. Error 1 1. Press ENTER and start RESET. If still no response, please contact local distributor or return to the factory. To view the fault DC BUS voltage, output current and output voltage, press “MENU”“Fault Record”.
• Page 171
  2. Go to File(F)Click on New. The Window below will pop up. At the device type, click on the drop down menu and choose DELTA VFD-C Inverter. At the TP type, click on the drop down menu and choose VFD-C KeyPad.
• Page 172
  Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Series 2. Static Text . Open a blank page, click once on this button , and then double click on that blank page. The following windows will pop up. On the right hand side of the Static Text Setting, you can adjust the frame setting, the text direction, the alignment and the font setting.
• Page 173
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad C2000 icon that you need. Then drag that icon and enlarge it to the size that you need on that blank page. For example, if you drag this icon to a blank page, you will see the following window. 5.
• Page 174
  Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Series Edit Main Page Click on a page under the TP Page to edit or go to View  click on Boot Page to begin to edit main page. The objects available for you to use are in the red circles below.
• Page 175
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad C2000 Value Length: Click on the drop down to choose 16bits or 32 bits. Then click OK to accept the setting or click Cancel to abort. Main Scale & Sub Scale: In order to divide the whole scale into equal parts, key in the numbers of your choices for main scale and sub scale.
• Page 176
  Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Series d. There are no supported functions other than the setting mentioned above. Clock Display Setting : Click once on this button Open a new file and click once in that window, you will see the following In the clock display setting, you can choose to display Time, Day or Date on the Keypad.
• Page 177
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad C2000 Related Device: There are two blank spaces to fill in, one is <Write> and another one is <Read>. Input the numbers that you want to display and the corresponding numbers of a parameter and that of a communication port.
• Page 178
  Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Series 10-4 Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 Fault Codes and Descriptions Following fault codes and description are for digital keypad KPC-CC01 with version V1.01 and version higher. LCM Display Description Fault FrEr Keypad flash memory read error kpdFlash Read Er…
• Page 179
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad C2000 Fault Descriptoin of File Copy and Setting Errors LCM Display Description File 1 Parameter and rile are read only Read Only File 1 Fail to write parameter and file Write Fail File 1 AC drive is in operating status VFD Running File 1 AC drive parameter is locked…
• Page 180
  Chapter 10 Digital KeypadC2000 Series LCM Display Description File 1 Other AC drive error VFD Issue 10-24…
• Page 181
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings This chapter provides summary of parameter settings for user to gather the parameter setting ranges, factory settings and set parameters. The parameters can be set, changed and reset by the digital keypad.
• Page 182
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 0: No function 1: Read only 5: Reset KWH display to 0 6: Reset PLC (including CANopen Master Index) 7: Reset CANopen Index (Slave) 00-02 Parameter Reset 8: keypad lock 9: All parameters are reset to factory settings(base…
• Page 183
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series negative, using Nt-m as unit (t 0.0: positive torque; -0.0: negative torque (C.) 40: Torque Command, unit %(L) 41: KWH, unit KWH(J) 42: PID Reference, unit % (h.) 43: PID offset (%) (o.) 44: PID Output Fcmd(Hz) (b.)
• Page 184
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-16 without direction) 5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr.10-16) 6: CANopen communication card 7: Reserved 8: Communication card (no CANopen card) 0: Digital keypad 1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled.
• Page 185
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 0: Disable 0~65535 (when Pr.00-25 set to no decimal place) 00-26 Max. User Defined Value 0.0~6553.5 (when Pr.00-25 set to 1 decimal place) 0.0~655.35 (when Pr.00-25 set to 2 decimal place) 0.0~65.535 (when Pr.00-25 set to 3 decimal place)
• Page 186
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 5: Forward run and search for Z-pulse as check point. 6: Forward run to home. Set ORG: ON→OFF as check point. 7: Reverse run to home. Set ORG : ON→OFF as check point.
• Page 187
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 01 Basic Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 60.00/ 01-00 Max. Operation Frequency 50.00~600.00Hz 50.00 60.00/ 01-01 Output Frequency of Motor 1 0.00~600.00Hz 50.00 230V: 0.0V~255.0V 200.0 01-02 Output Voltage of Motor 1 400.0 460V: 0.0V~510.0V…
• Page 188
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 01-22 JOG Frequency 6.00  0.00~600.00Hz 01-23 1st/4th Accel/decel Frequency 0.00  0.00~600.00Hz 0.20 Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second 01-24 S-curve Acceleration Begin Time 1  Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second 0.20 Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second…
• Page 189
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 02 Digital Input/Output Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 0: 2-wire mode, power on for operation control 02-00 2-wire/3-wire Operation Control 1: 2-wire mode 2, power on for operation control 2: 3-wire, power on for operation control…
• Page 190
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 39: Torque command direction 40: Force coast to stop 41: HAND switch 42: AUTO switch 43: Enable resolution selection (Pr.02-48) 44: Reversed direction homing 45: Forward direction homing 46: Homing (ORG)
• Page 191
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 18: Preliminary count value attained, returns to 0 (Pr.02-19) 19: Base Block 20: Warning output 21: Over voltage warning 22: Over-current stall prevention warning 23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning…
• Page 192
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series External Operation Control 0: Disable 02-35 Selection after Reset and  1: Drive runs if run command exists after reset Activate 02-47 Zero-speed Level of Motor  0~65535 rpm Max. Frequency of Resolution 02-48 60.00…
• Page 193
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 03 Analog Input/Output Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 03-00 Analog Input Selection (AVI) 0: No function  1: Frequency command (speed limit under torque 03-01 Analog Input Selection (ACI)  control mode) 03-02…
• Page 194
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 0: Disable 1: Continue operation at the last frequency 03-19 ACI Signal Loss  2: Decelerate to 0Hz 3: Stop immediately and display ACE 03-20 Multi-function Output 1 (AFM1) 0: Output frequency (Hz) …
• Page 195
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 03-35 AFM1 filter output time 0.00 ~ 20.00 Seconds 0.01 03-36 AFM2 filter output time 0.00 ~ 20.00 Seconds 0.01 03-37 Reserve 03-49 0: Regular Curve 1: 3 point curve of AVI 2: 3 point curve of ACI 3: 3 point curve of AVI &…
• Page 196
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 04 Multi-step Speed Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 04-00 1st Step Speed Frequency  0.00~600.00Hz 04-01 2nd Step Speed Frequency  0.00~600.00Hz 04-02 3rd Step Speed Frequency  0.00~600.00Hz 04-03 4th Step Speed Frequency …
• Page 197
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting Position command 12 -30000~30000 04-37 (revolution) -32767~32767 04-38 Position command 12 (pulse)  Position command 13 -30000~30000 04-39 (revolution) -32767~32767 04-40 Position command 13 (pulse)  Position command 14…
• Page 198
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 05 Motor Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 0: No function 1: Rolling test for induction motor(IM) (Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current) 2: Static test for induction motor(IM) 3: No function 05-00 Motor Auto Tuning…
• Page 199
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Delay Time for 05-25 Y-connection/△-connection 0.200  0.000~60.000 sec. Switch of Induction Motor Accumulative Watt-second of 05-26 Read only Motor in Low Word (W-sec) Accumulative Watt-second of 05-27 Read only Motor in High Word (W-sec)
• Page 200
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 06 Protection Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 230V: 180.0 Frame A to D: 150.0~220.0Vdc 200.0 Frame E and frames above E: 190.0~220.0V 06-00 Low Voltage Level  460V: Frame A to D: 300.0~440.0Vdc 360.0…
• Page 201
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 0～100% (Pr.06-03, Pr.06-04) 06-16 Stall Prevention Limit Level  06-17 Present Fault Record 0: No fault record Second Most Recent Fault 06-18 1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA) Record 06-19…
• Page 202
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 53: Reserved 54: Communication error (CE1) 55: Communication error (CE2) 56: Communication error (CE3) 57: Communication error (CE4) 58: Communication Time-out (CE10) 59: PU Time-out (CP10) 60: Brake transistor error (bF) 61: Y-connection/△-connection switch error (ydc)
• Page 203
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting Read 06-34 DC Voltage at Malfunction 0.0~6553.5 V only Read 06-35 Output Current at Malfunction 0.00~655.35 Amp only Read 06-36 IGBT Temperature at Malfunction 0.0~6553.5 ℃ only Capacitance Temperature at…
• Page 204
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting Read 06-63 Fault Record 1 (Day) 0~65535 days only Read 06-64 Fault Record 1 (Min) 0~1439 min only Read 06-65 Fault Record 2 (Day) 0~65535 days only Read 06-66…
• Page 205
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 07 Special Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 380.0 230V: 350.0~450.0Vdc 07-00 Software Brake Level  760.0 460V: 700.0~900.0Vdc 07-01 DC Brake Current Level  0~100% 07-02 DC Brake Time at Start-up  0.0~60.0 sec.
• Page 206
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 0: Disable 07-21 Auto Energy-saving Operation  1: Enable 07-22 Energy-saving Gain 10～1000%  0: Enable AVR Auto Voltage Regulation(AVR) 07-23  1: Disable AVR Function 2: Disable AVR during deceleration…
• Page 207
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 08 High-function PID Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 0: No function 1: Negative PID feedback: on analogue input acc. To setting 5 of Pr. 03-00 to Pr.03-02. 2: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip direction) 3: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
• Page 208
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 09 Communication Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 09-00 COM1 Communication Address  1~254 09-01 COM1 Transmission Speed  4.8～115.2Kbps 0: Warn and continue operation COM1 Transmission Fault 1: Warn and ramp to stop 09-02 …
• Page 209
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 09-27 Reserved 09-29 Communication Decoding 0: Decoding Method 1 09-30 Method 1: Decoding Method 2 0: Modbus 485 -1: Internal Communication Slave 1 -2: Internal Communication Slave 2 -3: Internal Communication Slave 3…
• Page 210
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 09-44 Reserved 0: Disable 09-45 CANopen Master Function 1: Enable 09-46 CANopen Master Address 1~127 09-47 Reserved 09-59 0: No communication card 1: DeviceNet Slave 2: Profibus-DP Slave Identifications for…
• Page 211
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting Address Mask 1 of the 09-80 0~255 Communication Card Address Mask 2 of the 09-81 0~255 Communication Card Address Mask 3 of the 09-82 0~255 Communication Card Address Mask 4 of the…
• Page 212
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters IM: Induction Motor; PM: Permanent Magnet Motor NOTE Factory Explanation Settings Setting 0: Disable 1: ABZ 2: ABZ (Delta Encoder for Delta servo motor) 10-00 Encoder Type Selection…
• Page 213
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting  10-19 Positioning for Encoder Position 0~65535pulse Range for Encoder Position  10-20 0~65535pulse Attained  10-21 Filter Time (PG2) 0~65.535 sec 0.100 0: Electronic Frequency 10-22 Speed Mode (PG2)
• Page 214
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 11 Advanced Parameters IM: Induction Motor; PM: Permanent Magnet Motor NOTE Factory Explanation Settings Setting bit 0: Auto tuning for ASR and APR bit 1: Inertia estimate (only for FOCPG mode) bit 2: Zero servo…
• Page 215
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 11-29 Torque Offset Setting  0~100% 11-30 High Torque Offset 30.0  0~100% 11-31 Middle Torque Offset 20.0  0~100% 11-32 Low Torque Offset 10.0  0~100% 0: Digital keypad 1: RS-485 communication (Pr.11-34)
• Page 216
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings 00 Drive Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation. Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive Factory Setting: #.# Settings Read Only Display AC Motor Drive Rated Current Factory Setting: #.#…
• Page 217
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Parameter Reset Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: No Function 1: Write protection for parameters Reset KWH display to 0 6: Reset PLC (including CANopen Master Index) 7: Reset CANopen Index (Slave) 8: keypad lock…
• Page 218
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 8: Display estimate output torque % (t = 00: positive torque; -00 negative torque) (t) 9: Display PG feedback (G) (refer to Note 1) 10: Display PID feedback in % (b) 11: Display AVI in % (1.), 0~10V/4-20mA/0-20mA corresponds to 0~100% (Refer to Note 2) 12: Display ACI in % (2.),…
• Page 219
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 41: KWH display, unit: KWH(J) 42: PID reference, unit: %(h.) 43: PID offset, unit: %(o.) 44: PID output frequency, unit: Hz(b.) NOTE 1. When Pr.10-01 is set to 1000 and Pr.10-02 is set to 1/2, the display range for PG feedback will be from 0 to 4000.
• Page 220
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Coefficient Gain in Actual Output Frequency Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0~160.00  This parameter is to set coefficient gain in actual output frequency. Set Pr.00-04= 31 to display the calculation result on the screen (calculation = output frequency * Pr.00-05).
• Page 221
  Settings 0: Speed mode 1: Point-to-Point position control 2: Torque mode 3: Home mode  This parameter determines the control mode of C2000 series AC motor drive. Control of Speed Mode Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: VF (IM V/f control)
• Page 222
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 0: (IM V/f control): user can design proportion of V/f as required and can control multiple motors simultaneously. 1: (IM V/f control + Encoder): user can use optional PG card with encoder for the closed-loop speed control.
• Page 223
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  When setting Pr.00-11 to 2, the sensorless vector control diagram is shown as follows. DC BUS DC BUS Voltage Voltage Protection Detection Current Fcmd Detection Pr00-20 IGBT table e->s 07-23 Top limit F:01-10…
• Page 224
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 11-12 Gain for ASR Speed Feed Forward 00-20 11-00 Bit 0=0 Torque Limit 11-14 11-06~11-11, 11-17~11-20 11-00 Bit 0=1 11-03~11-05, no offset by 03-00 TqBias by 11-29 11-28 by multi function input Torque command…
• Page 225
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 10 39 07-01 command ACRd dq2abc feedback Wr_cmd command Wr_est ACRq 10-35 _est 11-01~11-05 10-31~10-33 10-36 Iq feedback dq2abc 10-34 Point to Point Position control Factory Settings: 0 Settings: 0: Incremental Type 1: Absolute Type …
• Page 226
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series no offset by P r.03- 00 by P r.11- 29 by multi -function input Tor que command 11- 34 06-12 11-35 11- 36 or 00- 20 Speed li mit or command s peed/torque…
• Page 227
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  TQC Sensorless control diagram is shown in the following: Reserved Reserved Load Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Normal load 1: Heavy load  Normal duty: over load, rated output current 160% in 3 second. Please refer to Pr.00-17 for the setting of carrier wave.
• Page 228
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Heavy Duty Factory 2kHz Setting 460V Series Models 1-20HP [0.75-15kW] 25-75HP [18.5-55kW] 100-475HP [75-355kW] Setting Range 02~15kHz 02~10kHz 02~09kHz Normal Duty Factory 8kHz 6kHz 4kHz Setting Heavy Duty Factory 2kHz Setting Electromagnetic Heat…
• Page 229
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-16 without direction) 5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr.10-16) 6: CANopen communication card 7: Reserved 8: Communication card (no CANopen card)  It is used to set the source of the master frequency in AUTO mode.
• Page 230
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Freq uen cy Freq uen cy Output Output Frequenc y Frequenc y Moto r Moto r Ro tatio n Ro tatio n Spe ed Spe ed Fr ee r unning to stop Time…
• Page 231
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Bit 4~15: user defined unit 000xh: Hz 001xh: rpm 002xh: % 003xh: kg  Bit 0~3: Control F page, unit of user defined value (Pr00-04 =d10, PID feedback) and the decimal point of Pr00-26 which supports up to 3 decimal points.
• Page 232
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Reserved LOCAL/REMOTE Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Standard HOA function 1: Switching Local/Remote, the drive stops 2: Switching Local/Remote, the drive runs as the REMOTE setting for frequency and operation status 3: Switching Local/Remote, the drive runs as the LOCAL setting for frequency…
• Page 233
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Source of the Operation Command (HAND)  Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Digital keypad 1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled. 2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP disabled. 3: CANopen communication card 4: Reserved 5: Communication card (not include CANopen card …
• Page 234
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 0: Forward run to home. Set PL forward limit as check point. 1: Reverse run (CCW) to home. Set NL reverse limit (CCWL) as check point. 2: Forward run to home. Set ORG : OFF→ON as check point.
• Page 235
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Speed Posi tion Z p ulse ORGP 4. When Y=1, X=3 Speed Posi tion Z p ulse ORGP 5. When Y=2, X=2 Speed Posi tion ORGP 6. When Y=2, X=3 Speed Position ORGP 7.
• Page 236
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 8. When Y=2, X=5 Speed Position Z pulse Homing by Frequency 1 Factory Setting: 8.00 Settings 0.00~600.00Hz Homing by Frequency 2 Factory Setting: 2.00 Settings 0.00~600.00Hz  Control by Multi-funcion Input Terminal Pr. 02-01~02-08 (44~47).
• Page 237
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Group 1 Basic Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation. Maximum Output Frequency Factory Setting: 60.00/50.00 Settings 50.00~600.00Hz  This parameter determines the AC motor drive’s Maximum Output Frequency. All the AC motor drive frequency command sources (analog inputs 0 to +10V, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 20mAand ±10V) are…
• Page 238
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Factory Setting: 11.0/22.0 Settings 230V series: 0.0~240.0V 460V series: 0.0~480.0V Mid-point Frequency 2 of Motor 1 Factory Setting: 0.50 Settings 0.00~600.00Hz Mid-point Voltage 2 of Motor 1  Factory Setting: 2.0/4.0 Settings 230V series: 0.0~240.0V 460V series: 0.0~480.0V…
• Page 239
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Pr.02-01~02-08 and Pr.02-26 ~Pr.02-31 are set to 14 and enabled, the AC motor drive will act as the 2nd V/f curve.  The V/f curve for the motor 1 is shown as follows. The V/f curve for the motor 2 can be deduced from it.
• Page 240
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Start-Up Frequency Factory Setting: 0.50 Settings 0.0~600.00Hz  When start frequency is higher than the min. output frequency, drives’ output will be from start frequency to the setting frequency. Please refer to the following diagram for details.
• Page 241
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Output Frequency Lower Limit  Factory Setting: 0.00 Settings 0.0~600.00Hz  The upper/lower output frequency setting is used to limit the actual output frequency. If the frequency setting is higher than the upper limit, it will run with the upper limit frequency. If output frequency lower than output frequency lower limit and frequency setting is higher than min.
• Page 242
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series frequency upper limit or max. operation frequency. Accel. Time 1  Decel. Time 1  Accel. Time 2  Decel. Time 2  Accel. Time 3  Decel. Time 3  Accel. Time 4 …
• Page 243
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Frequency 01-00 Max. O utput Frequency Frequency Setting Time accel. time decel. time 01-12,14,16,18,20 01-13,15,17,19,21 Accel./Decel. Time JOG Frequency  Factory Setting: 6.00 Settings 0.00~600.00Hz  Both external terminal JOG and key “F1” on the keypad KPC-CC01 can be used. When the jog command is ON, the AC motor drive will accelerate from 0Hz to jog frequency (Pr.01-22).
• Page 244
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series S-curve Acceleration Arrival Time 2  S-curve Deceleration Begin Time 1  S-curve Deceleration Arrival Time 2  Factory Setting: 0.20/0.2 Settings Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 seconds Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~250.0 seconds  It is used to give the smoothest transition between speed changes. The accel./decel. curve can adjust the S-curve of the accel./decel.
• Page 245
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 01- 28 fa ll in g fr eq ue ncy 01- 29 Inter nal 01- 30 frequency 01- 31 command 01- 32 r isi ng fre qu en cy 01- 33 F requenc y s etting command…
• Page 246
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  When setting to 0, refer to Pr.01-01~01-08 for motor 1 V/f curve. For motor 2, please refer to Pr.01-35~01-42.  When setting to 1 or 2, 2 and 3 voltage frequency setting are invalid.
• Page 247
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series F requenc y 01-00 Max. Fr equency 01- 07 Min. T ime accel. time decel. time Fr equency 01-12 01-14 01-13 01-15 01-16 01-18 01-17 01-19 Acc el./Decel. Time When P r.01-44 is set to 0.
• Page 248
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 02 Digital Input/Output Parameter  This parameter can be set during operation. 2-wire/3-wire Operation Control Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: 2 wire mode 1 1: 2 wire mode 2 2: 3 wire mode …
• Page 249
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI13) Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI14) Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI15) Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: no function 1: multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position command 1…
• Page 250
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 52: Selection for PLC mode bit1 53: Trigger CANopen quick stop 54~55: Reserve 56: Local/Remote Selection 57~70: Reserve  This parameter selects the functions for each multi-function terminal.  The terminals of Pr.02-26~Pr.02-29 are virtual and set as MI10~MI13 when using with optional card EMC-D42A.
• Page 251
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions Fr eq ue ncy S etti ng A ccel . in hi bi t fr eq ue ncy De cel . in hi bi t a re a a re a…
• Page 252
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions Digital Up command When the contact is ON, the frequency will be increased and decreased. If this function is constantly ON, the frequency will be increased/decreased by Pr.02-09/Pr.02-10. Digital Down command PID function disabled When the contact is ON, the PID function is disabled.
• Page 253
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions V ol tag e Fr eq ue ncy S etti ng fr eq ue ncy Ti me MI — GND O FF Re set O FF O pe ra tio n…
• Page 254
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions position mod e sp eed m ode MI=d34 MI=d35 MI=d1 MI=d2 MI=d3 MI=4 Ma ster freque ncy Output freque ncy 04-12 04-38 13th step 04-40 mu lti- sp eed mu lti-…
• Page 255
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions (valid at stop) positions and write current motor position into such corresponding multi-step position. Run/Stop 101 0 =10 1011 =11 co rres pond s to co rres pond s Pr.04-34 to Pr.0 4-36…
• Page 256
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions 1. When MI is switched to off status, it executes a STOP command. , If MI is switched to off during operation, the drive HAND switch will also stop. 2. Using keypad KPC-CC01 to switch between HAND/AUTO, the drive will stop first then switch to the HAND or AUTO status.
• Page 257
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions Bit 0 57~70 Reserved UP/DOWN Key Mode  Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Up/down by the accel/decel time 1: Up/down constant speed (Pr.02-10) Constant speed. The Accel. /Decel. Speed of the UP/DOWN Key …
• Page 258
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series to prevent some uncertain interference that would cause error in the input of the digital terminals. Under this condition, confirmation for this parameter would improve effectively, but the response time will be somewhat delayed.
• Page 259
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 2: Operation speed attained 3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-22) 4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-24) 5: Zero speed (Frequency command) 6: Zero speed, include STOP(Frequency command) 7: Over torque 1(Pr.06-06~06-08) 8: Over torque 2(Pr.06-09~06-11) 9: Drive is ready 10: Low voltage warning（LV）(Pr.06-00)
• Page 260
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 44: Low current output (Pr.06-71 to Pr.06-73) 45: UVW Output Electromagnetic valve On/Off Switch 46: Master dEb action output 47: Closed brake output 48: Reserved 49: Homing action complete 50: Output for CANopen control…
• Page 261
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions Attained (Pr.02-20; not (Pr.02-19). This contact won’t active when Pr.02-20>Pr.02-19. return to 0) Preliminary Counter Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Counter Value Value Attained (Pr.02-19). (Pr.02-19; returns to 0)
• Page 262
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions Pr.04-26 Pr.04-28 Pr.04-30 Pr.04-32 Pr.04-34 Pr.04-36 Pr.04-38 Pr.04-40 Pr.04-42 Pr.04-44 This function should be used with Pr.02-32, Pr.02-33, Pr.02-34, Pr.02-57 and Pr.02-58. Active when setting Pr.07-16=Pr.02-34 and Fcmd > Pr.02-34 and Crane Function output current >…
• Page 263
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions Output Frequency Output Frequency < Pr.02-34 Multi-function Time Output 02-32 MO=d47 Reserved Homing Action Complete Output when homing action complete. Controlled by CANopen multi-output terminal For example, if to control RY2, then the Pr02-14 = 50.
• Page 264
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions P2-21 = 51 The bit 8 2640 P2-22 = 51 The bit 9 2640 P2-23 = 51 The bit 10 2640 Output for RS-485 For RS-485 output 53~62 Reserved Example: Crane Application…
• Page 265
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Bit setting bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 MO20 MO19 MO18 MO17 MO16 MO15 MO14 MO13 MO12 MO11 MO10 MO2 MO1 Reserved RY2 RY1 Terminal Counting Value Attained (return to 0) …
• Page 266
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Settings 0.00~600.00Hz The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 2  Factory Setting: 2.00 Settings 0.00~600.00Hz  Once output frequency reaches desired frequency and the corresponding multi-function output terminal is set to 3 or 4 (Pr.02-13, 02-14, 02-36, and 02-37), this multi-function output terminal will be…
• Page 267
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series frequ ency comma nd 07 -0 3 07 -0 2 DC b ra ke DC b ra ke time du ri ng time du ri ng stopp ing start-u p Outp ut DC b ra ke…
• Page 268
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series (Pr.02-13, 02-14, 02-16, and 02-17 is set to 28). Output Boundary for Multi-function Output Terminals  Factory Setting: 3.00 Settings 0.00~600.00Hz  When output frequency is higher or equal to Pr.02-34, it will activate the multi-function terminal (Pr.02-13, 02-14, 02-16, 02-17 is set to 29).
• Page 269
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series AUI +10V Acc el./Decel. time 01-12~01-19 AUI 0V Max. output frequency Max. output frequency 01-00 01-00 AUI — 10V F requenc y command Output Resolution switch Resolution switch frequency frequency frequency Delay time for max .
• Page 270
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Weights 0=O N 1=O FF Settings = bit5x 2 +bit4x2 +bit2x2 = 1×2 +1×2 + 1×2 NO TE =32+16+4 =52 2 =322 =16 2 =8 2 =4 2 =2 2 =1 Status of Multi-function Output Terminal Factory Setting: Read only …
• Page 271
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series are used by PLC. 0: not used by P LC Weights 1: used by PLC Displays = bit5x 2 +bit4x2 +bit2x2 = 1×2 +1×2 + 1x 2 =32+16+4 =52 NO TE 2 =16 38 4 2 =81 92…
• Page 272
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 0=NOT used by P LC 1=Used by PLC Weights R el ay 1 R el ay 2 R ese rve d D isp la y va lu e 3 =2+1 =1×2 +1×2 =bi t 1×2 +b i t 0 x2…
• Page 273
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 03 Analog Input/Output Parameter  This parameter can be set during operation. Analog Input Selection (AVI)  Factory Setting: 1 Analog Input Selection (ACI)  Factory Setting: 0 Analog Input Selection (AUI) …
• Page 274
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Positive torque 03-00~02=7 03-00~02=9 Positive torque limit Regenerative torque limit 03-00~02=10 Positive/negative torque limit Reverse Forward 03-00~02=10 03-00~02=9 Positive/negative torque limit Regenerative torque limit 03-00~02=8 Negative torque limit Negative Torque  When Pr.03-00~Pr.03-02 have the same setting, then the AVI will be the prioritized selection.
• Page 275
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 4: Serve bias as the center  In a noisy environment, it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin. It is recommended NOT to use less than 1V to set the operation frequency.
• Page 276
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Pr.03-03=10% Frequency Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode) 60Hz 0: No bias 54Hz Lower than or equal to bias 2: Greater than or equal to bias 3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage…
• Page 277
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series F requency Pr.03-03=10% 60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode) 54Hz 0: No bias Lower than or equal to bias 2: Greater than or equal to bias 3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage…
• Page 278
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series F requency Pr.03-03=-10% Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode) 60Hz 0: No bias Lower than or equal to bias 2: Greater than or equal to bias 3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage…
• Page 279
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series F requency Pr.03-03=-10% 60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode) 0: No bias Lower than or equal to bias 2: Greater than or equal to bias 3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage…
• Page 280
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series F requency Pr.03-03=-10% 60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode) 0: No bias Lower than or equal to bias 2: Greater than or equal to bias 3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage…
• Page 281
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series F requency Pr.03-03=10% Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode) 60Hz 0: No bias Lower than or equal to bias 2: Greater than or equal to bias 3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage…
• Page 282
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Pr.03-03=10% F requency Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode) 60Hz 0: No bias Lower than or equal to bias 2: Greater than or equal to bias 3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage…
• Page 283
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series F requency Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode) 0: No bias 60Hz Lower than or equal to bias 2: Greater than or equal to bias 3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as the center 4: Serve bias as the center Pr.03-10…
• Page 284
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series F requency Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode) 0: No bias 60Hz Lower than or equal to bias 2: Greater than or equal to bias 3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as the center 4: Serve bias as the center Pr.03-10…
• Page 285
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series F requency Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode) 0: No bias 60Hz Lower than or equal to bias 2: Greater than or equal to bias 3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as the center 4: Serve bias as the center Pr.03-10…
• Page 286
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Pr.00-21=0 (Dgital keypad control and d run in F WD direction) F requency Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10% Pr.03-05 Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode) 60Hz 0: No bias 1: Lower than or equal to bias…
• Page 287
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series F requency Pr.00-21=0 (Digital keypad control and run in F WD direction ) Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10% 60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode) 54Hz 0: No bias Lower than or equal to bias…
• Page 288
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Pr.00-21=0 (Digital keypad control and run in F WD direction) F requency Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10% Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode) 60Hz 0: No bias 54Hz Lower than or equal to bias…
• Page 289
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Pr.00-21=0 (Digital keypad control and run in F WD direction F requency Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10% 60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode) 0: No bias Lower than or equal to bias…
• Page 290
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Pr.00-21=0 igital keypad control and run in F WD direction) F requency Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10% Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode) 60Hz 0: No bias Lower than or equal to bias…
• Page 291
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Pr.00-21=0 igital keypad control and run in F WD direction) F requency Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10% Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/Negative Bias Mode) 60Hz 0: No bias Lower than or equal to bias…
• Page 292
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Addition Function of the Analog Input  Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI) 1: Enable  When Pr.03-18 is set to 0 and the analog input setting is the same, the priority for AVI, ACI and AUI are AVI>ACI>AUI.
• Page 293
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Power factor -1.000~1.000=100% Power Rated power is regarded as 100% Output torque Full-load torque is regarded as 100% 0~10V=0~100% 0~20mA=0~100% -10~10V=0~100% q-axis current (Iq) (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100% q-axis feedback value (Iq) (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%…
• Page 294
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 10V( 20mA) 10V( 20mA) 10V( 20mA) 03-18 03-21 F requenc y F requenc y 03-24 ( 12mA) ( 0mA) ( 0mA) 03-22=1 03-22=2 03-22=0 03-25=1 03-25=2 03-25=0 Selections for the analog output dir ec ti on…
• Page 295
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Status of PLC Output Terminal  Factory Setting: ## Settings 0~65535 Monitor the status of PLC analog output terminals  P.03-30 shows the external multi-function output terminal that used by PLC. 0=O N…
• Page 296
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  Reserve Analog Input Curve Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Regular Curve 1: 3 point curve of AVI 2: 3 point curve of ACI 3: 3 point curve of AVI & ACI 4: 3 point curve of AUI 5: 3 point curve of AVI &…
• Page 297
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  The 3 parameters (Pr03-51, Pr03-53 and Pr03-53) must meet the following argument: P03-51 < P03-53 < P03-55. The 3 proportional points (Pr03-52, Pr03-54 and Pr03-56) doesn’t have any limit. Between two points is a linear calculation. The ACI and AUI are same as AVI.
• Page 298
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series ACI Low Point Factory Setting: 4.00 Settings Pr.03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V Pr.03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA ACI Proportional Low Point Factory Setting: 0.00 Settings 0.00~100.00% ACI Mid Point Factory Setting: 12.00 Settings 03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V 03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA ACI Proportional Mid Point Factory Setting: 50.00…
• Page 299
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Positive AUI Voltage Mid Point Factory Setting: 5.00 Settings 0.00~10.00V Positive AUI Voltage Proportional Mid Point Factory Setting: 50.00 Settings 0.00~100.00% Positive AUI Voltage High Point Factory Setting: 10.00 Settings 0.00~10.00V Positive AUI Voltage Proportional High Point Factory Setting: 100.00…
• Page 300
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  The 3 parameters (Pr03-69, Pr03-71 and Pr03-73) must meet the following argument: P03-69 < P03-71 < P03-73. The 3 proportional points (Pr03-70, Pr03-72 and Pr03-74) doesn’t have any limit. Between two points is a linear calculation …
• Page 301
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 04 Multi-Step Speed Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation.  1st Step Speed Frequency 2nd Step Speed Frequency  3rd Step Speed Frequency   4th Step Speed Frequency 5th Step Speed Frequency …
• Page 302
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 04-07 F requenc y 04-06 04-08 04-05 04-09 04-04 04-10 04-03 04-11 04-02 04-12 J OG Freq. 04-01 01-22 04-13 04-00 04-14 Master Spee d 10 11 12 13 14 15 Run/ Sto p…
• Page 303
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 04-22 04-03 4 step speed frequency Position command 4 (pulse) 04-24 04-04 5 step speed frequency Position command 5 (pulse) 04-26 04-05 6 step speed frequency Position command 6 (pulse) 04-28 04-06 7…
• Page 304
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Multi-step Target Position of P2P Maximum Speed of P2P Speed Status 1001 Position 9 04-31 04-32 04-08 1010 Position 10 04-33 04-34 04-09 1011 Position 11 04-35 04-36 04-10 1100 Position 12 04-37…
• Page 305
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 05 Motor Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation. Motor Auto Tuning Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: No function 1: Rolling test for induction motor (Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current)
• Page 306
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  Set Pr.05-00=6 to begin rolling test for IM motor flux curve. This function is available when the drive is in FOC/TQC Sensorless control. User may begin auto-tuning after setting up the motor information.
• Page 307
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series correct. For PM motor, set Pr.05-33=1 and complete the following settings according to your motor specifications, Pr.05-34 rated current, Pr.05-35 rated power, Pr.05-36 rated speed and Pr. 05-37 pole number. The acceleration time and deceleration time should be set according to your motor capacity.
• Page 308
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Rated Power of Induction Motor 1(kW)  Factory Setting: #.## Settings 0~655.35 kW  It is used to set rated power of the motor 1. The factory setting is the power of the drive.
• Page 309
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Settings 10~120%  This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current. Example: The rated current for 7.5HP (5.5kW) is 25A and factory setting is 22.5A. The range for setting will be 10~30A.(25*40%=10A and 25*120%=30A)
• Page 310
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  Frequency for Y-connection/△-connection Switch of Induction Motor Factory Setting: 60.00 Settings 0.00~600.00Hz Y-connection/△-connection Switch of Induction Motor IM Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Disable 1: Enable Delay Time for Y-connection/△-connection Switch of Induction Motor …
• Page 311
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series If switch poi nt is 60Hz, the accel . switch point i s 62Hz Decel. switch point is 58Hz Pr.05-23 switch △ Bandwidth is 2Hz In this area, motor i s i n free frequency run status .
• Page 312
  Inertia of Permanent Magnet Motor Factory Setting: 0.0 Settings 0.0~6553.5 kg.cm (0.0001kg.m  This parameter setting is defined in kg-cm . If this measure is not familiar to you, please refer to the chart below. (Delta’s motor inertia chart is for reference purpose only.)
• Page 313
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Delta Motor (Low inertia model) Rated Power(kW) 0.75 Rotor inertia (kg.m^2) 3.70E-06 1.77E-05 2.77E-05 6.80E-05 1.13E-04 2.65E-04 4.45E-04 Delta Motor (Mid to High Inertia model) Rated Power(kW) Rotor inertia (kg.m^2) 8.17E-04 8.41E-04 1.12E-03 1.46E-03 3.47E-03 8.17E-04 8.41E-04 1.12E-03 ※…
• Page 314
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 06 Protection Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation.  Low Voltage Level Factory Setting: Settings 230V Series: Frame A to D: 150.o~ 220.0 Vdc 180.0 Frame E and frames above E: 190.0~220.0V 200.0…
• Page 315
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series regenerated from the motor with heat type. Related parameters: Pr.01-13, 01-15, 01-17, 01-19 (settings of decel. time 1~4), Pr.02-13~02-14  (Multi-function Output 1 RY1, RY2), Pr. 02-16~02-17 Multi-function Output (MO1, 2) High-voltage at DC si de…
• Page 316
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration  Settings Normal duty: 0~160% (100%: drive’s rated current) Factory Setting: 120 Heavy duty: 0~180% (100%: drive’s rated current) Factory Setting: 150  If the motor load is too large or drive acceleration time is too short, the AC drive output current may increase abruptly during acceleration and it may cause motor damage or trigger protection functions (OL or OC).
• Page 317
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Pr.06-05) again to catch up with the set frequency command value. Ov er-Curr ent Detec tion Level Pr . 06-04 s etting 06-04 Current Pr . 06-04 s etting- rated dr ive c urrent X 5%…
• Page 318
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after detection  When Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 are set to 1 or 3, it will display a warning message and won’t have an abnormal record.  When Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 are set to 2 or 4, it will display a warning message and will have an abnormal record.
• Page 319
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 1)  Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 2)  Factory Setting: 2 0: Constant torque output motor Settings 1: Variable torque output motor 2: Disable  It is used to prevent self-cooled motor overheats under low speed. User can use electronic thermal relay to limit driver’s output power.
• Page 320
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Over-heating Level (℃) Over-heating Level (℃) VFD110C23A/E VFD300C43A/E VFD150C23A/E VFD370C43A/E VFD185C23A/E VFD450C43A/E VFD220C23A/E VFD550C43A/E VFD300C23A/E VFD750C43A/E VFD370C23A/E VFD900C43A/E VFD450C23A/E VFD1100C43A/E VFD550C23A/E VFD1320C43A/E VFD750C23A/E VFD1600C43A/E VFD900C23A/E VFD1850C43A/E VFD007C43A/E VFD2200C43A/E VFD015C43A/E VFD2800C43A/E VFD022C43A/E VFD3150C43A/E VFD037C43A/E…
• Page 321
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series V (P07-10≠0 & 7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA) P07-11≠0) V (P07-10≠0 & 8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd) P07-11≠0) V (P07-10≠0 & 9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn) P07-11≠0) 10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
• Page 322
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 44: PG feedback stall (PGF3) 45: PG slip error (PGF4) 46: PG ref loss (PGr1) 47: PG ref loss (PGr2) 48: Analog current input loss (ACE) 49: External fault input (EF) 50: Emergency stop (EF1) 51: External Base Block (bb) V (P07-10≠0)
• Page 323
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 111: InrCOM Internal communication overtime error When th  e fault occurs and force stopping, it will record in this parameter.  At stop with low voltage Lv (LvS warn, no record). During operation with mid-low voltage Lv (LvA, Lvd, Lvn error, will record).
• Page 324
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Fault Code current Volt. 23: Electronics thermal relay 2 (EoL2) ● 24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3) (PTC) ● 25: Reserved 26: Over-torque 1 (ot1) ● 27: Over-torque 2 (ot2) ●…
• Page 325
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Fault Code current Volt. 61: Y-connection/△-connection switch error ● (ydc) 62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb) ● 63: Slip error (oSL) ● 64: Electromagnet switch error (ryF) ●…
• Page 326
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  It is used to set the PTC level, and the corresponding value for 100% is max. analog input value. Frequency Command for Malfunction  Factory Setting: Read only Settings 0.00~655.35Hz  When malfunction occurs, use can check the frequency command. If it happens again, it will overwrite the previous record.
• Page 327
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Factory Setting: Read only 0.0~6553.5℃ Settings  When malfunction occurs, user can check the current motor speed in rpm. If it happens again, it will overwrite the previous record. Torque Command at Malfunction…
• Page 328
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Current detection level of output phase loss Factory Setting:1.00 Settings 0.00~655.35% Output phase loss detection function executing time before run Factory Setting:0.000 Settings 0.000~65.535 sec  During the run: Any output phase current is smaller than the level of Pr06-47 and starts to count time to surpass Pr06-46 …
• Page 329
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  Setting 0: When the rated current is constant, carrier frequency (Fc) outputted by PWM will auto decrease according to surrounding temperature, overload output current and time. If overload situation is not frequent and only cares the carrier frequency operated with the rated current for a long time and carrier wave changes during short overload, it is recommended to set to 0.
• Page 330
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Derating curve diagram in the normal duty (Pr.00-16=0) Pr.06-55=1 Pr.06-55=0 or 2 Pr.06-55=0 or 2 (40℃: UL open-type) (50℃: UL open-type) (30℃: UL type1 or open type_side by (40℃:UL type1 or open type_side by…
• Page 331
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Derating curve diagram in the heavy duty (Pr.00-16=1) Pr.06-55=1 Pr.06-55=0 or 2 Pr.06-55=0 or 2 (40℃: UL open-type) (50℃: UL open-type) (30℃: UL type1 or open type_side by (40℃: UL type1 or open type_side by…
• Page 332
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Air flow rate for cooling Power dissipation of AC motor drive Flow Rate (cfm) Flow Rate (m /hr) Power Dissipation Model No. Loss External External Internal Total External Internal Total Internal Total (Heat sink)
• Page 333
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series PT100 Detection Level 1 Factory Setting:5.000 Settings 0.000~10.000V PT100 Detection Level 2 Factory Setting: 7.000 Settings 0.000~10.000V  Make sure Pr. 06-57 > Pr.06-56. PT100 Level 1 Frequency Protection Factory Setting: 0.00 Settings 0.00~600.00 Hz…
• Page 334
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 0-10V 0-10V 0-20mA Open 0-10V RC2 RB2 AFM1 AFM2 -10-10V 0-20mA 0-10V 0-20mA AFM1 +10V AVI +24V COM FWD MO2 MCM SGND AFM2 -10V AUI SCM DFM DCM REV MI2 Removable Terminal Block…
• Page 335
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  When 3-phase current output unbalance value has exceeds Pr06-60 setting, drive will trip up GFF and stop output immediately. Disable Level of dEb Factory Setting: 180.0/360.0 Settings 230V series: 0.0~220.0 Vic 460V series: 0.0~440.0 Vic…
• Page 336
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Pr.06-18 Pr.06-64 3482 Pr.06-19 Pr.06-65 3000 Seven fault Pr.06-17 Pr.06-63 (12-5824)+64800=58988 min ocS occurs at 58988 min after last fault (ocA) Pr.06-18 Pr.06-64 5824 Pr.06-19 Pr.06-65 5003 Pr.06-20 Pr.06-66 4051 Pr.06-21 Pr.06-67 3482 Pr.06-22…
• Page 337
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series BLANK PAGE…
• Page 338
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 07 Special Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation. Software Brake Level  Factory Setting: 380.0/760.0 Settings 230V series: 350.0~450.0Vdc 460V series: 700.0~900.0Vdc  This parameter sets the DC-bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated. Users can choose the suitable brake resistor to have the best deceleration.
• Page 339
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Start-Point for DC Brake  Factory Setting: 0.00 Settings 0.00~600.00Hz  This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration. When this setting is less than start frequency (Pr.01-09), the start-point for DC brake will start from the min.
• Page 340
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  Setting 1: Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the Master Frequency reference value after drive output frequency and motor rotator speed is synchronous. The motor has the characteristics of big inertia and small obstruction. For example, in the equipment with big inertia wheel, it doesn’t need to wait to execute operation command until…
• Page 341
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Output frequency Input B.B. signal Stop output voltage Disable B.B. signal Output voltage Waiting time 08.07 output current A Speed Search 07-09 Current Limit for Speed Search Speed Synchronization speed detection Time FWD Run B.B.
• Page 342
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  Fault includes: bb,oc,ov,occ. To restart after oc, ov, occ, Pr.07-11 can not be set to 0. Auto Restart Time after Fault  Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0~10  After fault (oc, ov, occ) occurs, the AC motor drive can be reset/restarted automatically up to 10 times.
• Page 343
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  function is the AC motor drive decelerates to stop after momentary power loss. When the momentary power loss occurs, this function can be used for the motor to decelerate to 0 speed with deceleration stop method.
• Page 344
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Dwell Time at Accel.  Factory Setting: 0.00 Settings 0.00~600.00 sec Dwell Frequency at Accel.  Factory Setting: 0.00 Settings 0.00~600.00Hz Dwell Time at Decel.  Factory Setting: 0.00 Settings 0.00~600.00 sec Dwell Frequency at Decel.
• Page 345
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Emergency Stop (EF) & Force Stop Factory Setting: 0 0: Coast to stop Settings 1: Stop by 1 deceleration time 2: Stop by 2 deceleration time 3: Stop by 3 deceleration time 4: Stop by 4…
• Page 346
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  When drive is at FOCPM or FOC sensor-less control mode, this function will be disable. Frequency command= Frequency output Output voltage Output current Output current 0 35 <( . Drive rated current )
• Page 347
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series DC-bus voltage. The output voltage won’t be changed by DC bus voltage.  Setting 1: when AVR function is disabled, the drive will calculate the output voltage by DC-bus voltage. The output voltage will be changed by DC bus voltage. It may cause insufficient/over current.
• Page 348
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series proportion to produce the same magnetic torque. That is the slip will be larger with the reduction of synchronous frequency. The motor may stop when the synchronous frequency is decreased to a specific value. Therefore, the slip serious affects the accuracy of motor speed at low speed.
• Page 349
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Recovery Time to Pr.07-11 (# of automatic reboots after fault)  Factory Setting:60.0 Settings 00~6000.0 sec  When a reset/restart after fault occurs, the drive will regards Pr.07-33 as a time boundary and beging counting the numbers of faults occur within this time period.
• Page 350
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 08 High-function PID Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation. Input Terminal for PID Feedback Factory Setting:0 Settings 0: No function 1: Negative PID feedback: on analogue input acc. To setting 5 of Pr. 03-00 to Pr.03-02.
• Page 351
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  PID control loop: drive execute PID control output value ¨ ¿¥ Setpoint     feedback signal sensor : Proportional gain(P) : Integral time(I) : Derivative control(D) : O perator  Concept of PID control Proportional gain(P): the output is proportional to input.
• Page 352
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series no fuse breaker (NFB) water pump R(L1) R(L1) U(T 1) S(L2) S(L2) V(T2) T(L3) T(L3) W(T 3) throttle F eedback 4-20mA pressure cor responds 0-10bar sensor ACI/A VI (4- 20mA /0- 10V ) analog si gnal common 1.
• Page 353
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  When the integral time is too small, it may cause system oscillation.  If the integral time is set as 0.00, Pr.08-02 will be disabled. Derivative Control (D)  Factory Setting:0.00 Settings 0.00~1.00 sec…
• Page 354
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series PID Mode Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Serial connection 1: Parallel connection  When setting is 0, it uses conventional PID control structure.  When setting is 1, proportional gain, integral gain and derivative gain are independent. The P, I and D can be customized to fit users’…
• Page 355
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  Serial connection PID Cancelled Input Selection of the Frequency 08-00=0 PID Target Value command or 02-01~06=21(disable) 00-20:KPC-CC01/ RS485 03-00~02: 4 PID target value Compensation Selection Delay 08-16 Time 08-07 Differential Proportion Time…
• Page 356
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Feedback Signal Fault Treatment Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Warn and keep operation 1: Warn and ramp to stop 2: Warn and coast to stop 3: Warn and operate at last frequency  This parameter is valid only for ACI 4-20mA.
• Page 357
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series target value.  Refer to the PID control diagram for details. When executing PID feedback control, if |PID reference target value – detection value| > Pr.08-13 PID Deviation Level and exceeds Pr.08-14 setting, the PID control fault occurs. The treatment will be done as Pr.08-09 setting.
• Page 358
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Wake-up delay time Factory Setting: 0.00 Settings 0.00~600.00 sec.  Refer to Pr08-18 for more information.  PID Control Bit Factory Setting: 0.00 Settings Bit0 =1, PID reverse running must follow the setting of Pr00-23 Bit0 = 0, PID reverse running follows PID’s calculated value…
• Page 359
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series frequency command output frequency Acceleration Time Limit Pr08-22 Wake-up Delay Time 3) PID Feedback Rate Percentage ( Use PID, Pr08-00 ≠ 0 and Pr08-18=1) When the PID feedback rate reaches the sleep level percentage, the VFD starts to count the sleep time.
• Page 360
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 09 Communication Parameters  The parameter can be set during the operation. Modbus RS- 485 When us ing communication devi ces, Pin 1~2,7,8: Reserv ed connects AC dr ive with P C by us ing Pin 3, 6: GND Delta IFD6530 or IFD6500.
• Page 361
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 10: 8, E, 2 for ASCII 11: 8, O, 2 for ASCII 12: 8, N, 1 for RTU 13: 8, N, 2 for RTU 14: 8, E, 1 for RTU 15: 8, O, 1 for RTU…
• Page 362
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series （7 , O , 1） Start Stop parity 7-data bits 10-bits character frame 11-bit character frame (For RTU): （8 , N , 2） Start Stop Stop 8-data bits 11-bits character frame （8 , E , 1）…
• Page 363
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Contents of data: DATA (n-1) n×8-bit data, n<=16 ……. DATA 0 CRC CHK Low CRC check sum: 16-bit check sum consists of 2 8-bit characters CRC CHK High A silent interval of more than 10 ms Address (Communication Address) Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254.
• Page 364
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series CRC CHK Low Content of data CRC CHK High address 2103H CRC CHK Low CRC CHK High 06H: single write, write single data to register. Example: writing data 6000(1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H.
• Page 365
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series ‘2’ ‘2’ Number of data ‘0’ ‘E’ LRC Check (count by byte) ‘4’ ‘8’ ‘1’ ‘3’ The first data content ‘8’ ‘8’ ‘0’ ‘F’ The second data content ‘A’ ‘0’ ‘9’ LRC Check ‘A’…
• Page 366
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Step 4: If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling, then repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H, then repeat step 3.
• Page 367
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 4. Address list Content Address Function AC drive parameters GGnnH GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number, for example, the address of Pr 4-01 is 0401H. Command write only 2000H 00B：No function Bit1~0 01B：Stop…
• Page 368
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Content Address Function Bit4~3 Operation Direction 00B: FWD run 01B: From REV run to FWD run 10B: REV run 11B: From FWD run to REV run Bit8 1：Master frequency controlled by communication interface Bit9 1：Master frequency controlled by analog signal…
• Page 369
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Content Address Function 2211H The status of digital output (ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-18 (as Pr. 00-04 NOTE 4) 2212H The multi-step speed that is executing (S) 2213H The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (d.) (as Pr.
• Page 370
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series In the exception response, the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1, and an exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned. Example: ASCII mode: RTU mode: ‘:’…
• Page 371
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Block Transfer 1   Block Transfer 2 Block Transfer 3   Block Transfer 4 Block Transfer 5  Block Transfer 6  Block Transfer 7  Block Transfer 8  …
• Page 372
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Internal Communication Protocol Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Modbus 485 -1: Internal Communication Slave 1 -2: Internal Communication Slave 2 -3: Internal Communication Slave 3 -4: Internal Communication Slave 4 -5: Internal Communication Slave 5…
• Page 373
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Reserved CANopen Warning Record Factory Setting: 0 Settings bit 0: CANopen Guarding Time out bit 1: CANopen Heartbeat Time out bit 2: CANopen SYNC Time out bit 3: CANopen SDO Time out bit 4: CANopen SDO buffer overflow…
• Page 374
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Reset CANopen Index Factory Setting: 65535 Settings: bit0: reset address 20XX to 0 bit1: reset address 264X to 0 bit2: reset address 26AX to 0 bit3: reset address 60XX to 0 Reserved CANopen Master Function…
• Page 375
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Profibus: ID number of a communication card. Each Profibus selling in the market must apply for an ID number at the Profibus International to be a unique product. Fault Code Factory Setting: ##…
• Page 376
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Reserved Reserved IP Configuration of the Communication Card Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Static IP 1: DynamicIP (DHCP)  Setting 0: it needs to set IP address manually.  Setting 1: IP address will be auto set by host controller.
• Page 377
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Reset Communication Card Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Disable 1: Reset, return to factory setting Additional Setting for Communication Card Factory Setting: 1 Settings Bit 0: Enable IP Filter Bit 1: Internet parameters enable(1bit) When IP address is set up, this bit need to be enabled to write down the parameters.
• Page 378
   For EMC-PG01U, when setting Pr.10-00=2 (Delta encoder) make sure SW1 is switched to D (Delta type). If the setting for Pr.10-00, 10-01 and 10-02 has changed, please turn off the drive’s power and reboots to prevent PM motor stall. This mode is suggested for PM motor.
• Page 379
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Encoder Input Type Setting Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Disable 1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B leads in a reverse run command 2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads in a reverse run command 3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input.
• Page 380
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  Parameters 10-04 to 10-07 can be used with the multi-function input terminal (set to 48) to switch to Pr.10-04~10-05 or Pr.10-06~10-07 as shown as follows Driv er car d Gear Gear Motor…
• Page 381
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Encoder Slip Range  Factory Setting: 50 Settings 0~50% 0: Disable Detection Time of Encoder Slip  Factory Setting: 0.5 Settings 0.0~10.0 sec Treatment for Encoder Stall and Slip Error  Factory Setting: 2…
• Page 382
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series needs 4096 pulses to rotate the motor a revolution.  Assume that Pr.10-01=1024, Pr.10-02=1, Pr.10-16=1, Pr.00-20=5, MI=37 and ON, it needs 1024 pulses to rotate the motor a revolution.  Position control diagram…
• Page 383
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Speed Mode (PG2) Factory Setting: 0 0: Electronic Frequency Settings 1: Mechanical Frequency (base on pole pair) Reserved FOC&TQC Function Control Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0~65535 Bit# Description ASR control at sensorless torque 0:use PI as ASR;…
• Page 384
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series FOC Gain of Excitation Current Rise Time Factory Setting:100 Settings 33~100% Tr (Tr: rotor time constant)  This parameter sets the drive’s excitation current rise time when activates at senslorless torque mode. When the drive’s activation time is too long at torque mode, please adjust this parameter to a shorter time constant.
• Page 385
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series PM Sensorless Control Word Factory Setting: 0000 Settings 0000~FFFFh Bit No. Function Description Reserved Reserved Choose a control mode to 0 :Start by IF mode statrt. 1: Start by VF mode Choose a mode to stop .
• Page 386
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  Pr05-35 Rated Power of Permanent Magnet Motor  Pr05-36 Rated speed of Permanent Magnet Motor  Pr05-37 Pole number of Permanent Magnet Motor  Pr05-38 Inertia of Permanent Magnet Motor 5. Set ASR Parameters …
• Page 387
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 11 Advanced Parameters  This parameter can be set during operation. In this parameter group, ASR is the abbreviation for Adjust Speed Regulator System Control Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Auto tuning for ASR and APR…
• Page 388
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Pr.11-05 11-06 use to adjus t the 11-07 1. Pr. 11-01 valu e stren gth o f ze ro — 2. set Pr.11 -0 0 to bit 0=1 se rvo lo ck 11-08…
• Page 389
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth  Factory Setting: 10 Settings 1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM) Zero-speed Bandwidth  Factory Setting: 10 Settings 1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)  After estimating inertia and set Pr.11-00 to bit 0=1 (auto tuning), user can adjust parameters Pr.11-03, 11-04 and 11-05 separately by speed response.
• Page 390
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series PDFF Gain Value  Factory Setting: 30 Settings 0~200%  After finishing estimating and set Pr.11-00 to bit 0=1 (auto tuning), using Pr.11-13 to reduce overshoot. Please adjust PDFF gain value by actual situation.
• Page 391
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series   Motor rated torque= ; P(W) value= Pr.05-02;    ω(rad/s) value= Pr.05-03。  . FOCPG and FOC sensor-less control mode The drive rated current=100%. The setting value of parameters Pr11-17~Pr11-20 will compare to Pr03-00=7, 8, 9 and 10.
• Page 392
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  For the spindle application, the adjustment method is 1. It is used to adjust the output voltage when exceeding rated frequency. 2. Monitor the output voltage 3. Adjust Pr.11-21 (motor 1) or Pr.11-22 (motor 2) setting to make the output voltage reach motor rated voltage.
• Page 393
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series position time will be. 11-26 11-25 Output frequency PG feedback 10-19 10-00 10-01 MI=d35 MO=d39 Time Max. Torque Command  Factory Setting: 100 Settings 0~500%  The upper limit of torque command is 100%.
• Page 394
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Torque Offset Setting  Factory Setting: 0.0 Settings 0.0~100.0%  This parameter is torque offset. The motor rated torque is 100%.  Calculation equation for motor rated torque:  motor rated torque: ; P(W) value= Pr.05-02;…
• Page 395
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series  This parameter is for the torque command. When Pr.11-27 is set to 250% and Pr.11-34 is set to 100%, actual torque command=250X100%=250% motor rated torque.  The drive will save the setting to the record before power turns off.
• Page 396
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Forward Speed Limit (torque mode)  Factory Setting: 10 Settings 0~120% Reverse Speed Limit (torque mode)  Factory Setting: 10 Settings 0~120%  These parameters are used in the torque mode to limit the running direction and opposite direction.
• Page 397
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Max. Frequency of Point- to-Point Position Control Factory Settings:10.00 Settings 0.00~327.67Hz Accel. Time of Point-to Point Position Control Factory Settings:1.00 Settings 0.00~655.35sec Decel. Time of Point-to Point Position Control Factory Settings:3.00 Settings 0.00~655.35sec Position Max.
• Page 398
  Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 Series Chapter 13 Warning Codes Di s p la y e rr o r si g n al Warning A b b r ev i a te e rr o r c o d e CE01 T h e co d e is d is p l a y e d as s h ow n on K P C- C E 01 .
• Page 399
  Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 Series ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Descriptions Warning Capacity over-heating warning Over heat 2 warn Warning PID feedback error PID FBK Error ACI signal error Warning When Pr03-19 is set to 1 and 2. Analog loss…
• Page 400
  Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 Series ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Descriptions Warning Motor over-heating Motor Over Heat Warning Over slip Over Slip Warn Warning Auto tuning processing Auto tuning Warning Keypad COPY error 3 Keypad copy between different power range drive…
• Page 401
  Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 Series ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Descriptions Warning CAN SDO received register overflow CSbn Buf Overflow Warning CAN boot up error Cbtn Boot up fault Warning CAN format error CPtn Error Protocol Warning Adjust RTC…
• Page 402
  Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 Series ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Descriptions Warning PLC MCR command error PLCr PLC MCR error Warning PLC download fail PLdF Download fail Warning PLC scan time exceed PLSF Scane time fail Warning CAN Master guarding error…
• Page 403
  Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 Series ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Descriptions Warning Duplicate MAC ID error ECid Node address setting error ExCom ID failed Warning Low voltage of communication card ECLv ExCom pwr loss Warning Communication card in test mode…
• Page 404
  Chapter 13 Warning CodesC2000 Series ID No. Display on LCM Keypad Descriptions Warning Check sum error for Communication card and drive ECCS ExCom Inr CRC Warning Communication card returns to default setting ECrF ExCom Rtn def Warning Modbus TCP exceed maximum communication…
• Page 405
  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions C2000 Series Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions Dis p la y e rro r sig n a l Warning A b b re v ia te e rro r c o d e CE01 T h e co d e is d isp la ye d a s s h o wn o n K P C-CE 0 1 .
• Page 406
  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions C2000 Series Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Fault Hardware failure in Return to the factory current detection Oc at stop 1. Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC DC BUS over-voltage motor drive input voltage range.
• Page 407
  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions C2000 Series Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Check Power Source Input if all 3 input phases are Fault connected without loose contacts. Phase Loss For models 40hp and above, please check if the fuse for the AC input circuit is blown.
• Page 408
  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions C2000 Series Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Motor overheating The AC motor drive Make sure that the motor is not obstructed. detecting internal Fault Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within temperature exceeds the the specified temperature range.
• Page 409
  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions C2000 Series Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Fault Reboots the power. If fault code is still displayed on the CC (current clamp) keypad please return to the factory cc HW error Fault Reboots the power. If fault code is still displayed on the…
• Page 410
  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions C2000 Series Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Fault Check the pulse wiring Pulse input error PGr1 Return to the factory PG Ref error Fault 1. Check the pulse wiring Pulse input loss PGr2 2.
• Page 411
  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions C2000 Series Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Fault Data is written to read-only Check if the communication address is correct address PC slave fault Fault Modbus transmission time-out CE10 PC time out Fault…
• Page 412
  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions C2000 Series Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Rotaing direction is different from the commanding direction deteced by the sensorless. Solution Fault SdRv Verify if the parameter setting of the motor drive is correct…
• Page 413
  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions C2000 Series Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Fault Output phase loss (Phase W) OPHL W phase lacked Fault Internal PLC forced to stop Fstp Verify the setting of Pr.00-32 For ce Stop Fault…
• Page 414
  15.3 CANopen Communication Interface Description 15.3.1 CANopen Control Mode Selection 15.3.2 DS402 Standard Control Mode 15.3.3 By using Delta Standard (Old definition, only support speed mode) 15.3.4 By using Delta Standard (New definition) 15.3.5 DI/DO AI AO are controlled via CANopen 15.4 CANopen Supporting Index…
• Page 415
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series Built-in EMC-COP01 card is included in VFDXXXC23E/VFDXXXC43E models. The built-in CANopen function is a kind of remote control. Master can control the AC motor drive by using CANopen protocol. CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol. It provides standardized communication objects, including real-time data (Process Data Objects, PDO), configuration data (Service Data Objects, SDO), and special functions (Time Stamp, Sync message, and Emergency message).
• Page 416
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series 15.1 CANopen Overview CANopen Protocol CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol, and was designed for motion-oriented machine control networks, such as handling systems. Version 4.02 of CANopen (CiA DS301) is standardized as EN50325-4. The CANopen specifications cover application layer and communication profile (CiA DS301), as well as a framework for programmable devices (CiA 302), recommendations for cables and connectors (CiA 303-1) and SI units and prefix representations (CiA 303-2).
• Page 417
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series CANopen Communication Protocol It has services as follows: NMT (Network Management Object)  SDO (Service Data Objects)  PDO (Process Data Object)  EMCY (Emergency Object)  NMT (Network Management Object) The Network Management (NMT) follows a Master/Slave structure for executing NMT service.
• Page 418
  SYNC. Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR. Type number 254: Delta CANopen doesn’t support this transmission format. Type number 255 indicates the data is asynchronous transmission. All PDO transmission data must be mapped to index via Object Dictionary.
• Page 419
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series 15.2 Wiring for CANopen An external adapter card: EMC-COP01 is used for CANopen wiring to connect CANopen to VFD C2000. The link is enabled by using RJ45 cable. The two farthest ends must be terminated with 120Ω…
• Page 420
  There are two control modes for CANopen; Pr.09-40 set to 1 is the factory setting mode DS402 standard and Pr.09-40 set to 0 is Delta’s standard setting mode. Actually, there are two control modes according to Delta’s standard, one is the old control mode (Pr09-30=0).
• Page 421
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series 2. Index correspond to parameters such as (2000 ~200B-XX) 3. Accelerating/Decelerating Index: 604F 6050 15-8…
• Page 422
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series 15.3.2 DS402 Standard Control Mode 15.3.2.1 Related set up of ac motor drive (by following DS402 standard) If you want to use DS402 standard to control the motor drive, please follow the steps below: Wiring for hardware (refer to chapter 15-2 Wiring for CANopen) Operation source setting: set Pr.00-21 to 3 for CANopen communication card control.
• Page 423
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series drive. Fault Reaction Active: The motor drive detects conditions which might trigger error(s). Fault: One or more than errors has occurred to the motor drive. Therefore, when the motor drive is turned on and finishes the initiation, it will remain at Ready to Switch on status.
• Page 424
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series Set command 6040 =0xE, then set another command 6040 =0xF. Then the motor drive can be switched to Operation Enable. The Index 605A decides the dashed line of Operation Enable when the control mode changes from Quick Stop Active. (When the setting value is 1~3, this dashed line is active.
• Page 425
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series NOTE 01: To know the current rotation speed, read 6043. (unit: rpm) NOTE 02: To know if the rotation speed can reach the targeting value; read bit 10 of 6041. (0: Not reached; 1: Reached) Torque mode 1.
• Page 426
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series NOTE: The standard DS402 doesn’t regulate the highest speed limit. Therefore if the motor drive defines the control mode of DS402, the highest speed will go with the setting of Pr11-36 to Pr11-38. NOTE 01: To know the current torque, read 6077 (unit: 0.1%).
• Page 427
  Note 01: To know if the home mode is completed, read bit 12 of 6041. (0: reached, 1: Not reached) 15.3.3 By using Delta Standard (Old definition, only support speed mode) 15-3.3.1 Various mode control method (by following DS402 standard) If you want to use DS402 standard to control the motor drive, please follow the steps below: Wiring for hardware (Refer to chapter 15.2 Wiring for CANopen)
• Page 428
  15.3.4 By using Delta Standard (New definition) 15-3-4-1 Related set up of ac motor drive (Delta New Standard) If you want to use DS402 standard to control the motor drive, please follow the steps below: Wiring for hardware (Refer to chapter 15.2 Wiring for CANopen) Operation source setting: set Pr.00-21 to 3 for CANopen communication card control.
• Page 429
  CANopen station setting: set Pr.09-36 (Choose source of position commend from CANopen setting.) as control mode: Pr. 09-40 = 0 and Delta Standard (Old definition, only support speed mode) 09-30 = 0. CANopen station setting: set Pr.09-36 (Range of setting is 1~127. When Pr.09-36=0, CANopen slave function is disabled.
• Page 430
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series Note01 To know what the current torque is, read 2061-07 (unit is 0.1%). Note02 To know if the torque can reach the setting value, read the bit 0 of 2061-01 (0: Not reached, 1: Reached).
• Page 431
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series NOTE01: To know the current position, read 2061-05. NOTE02: To know if reaching the target position, read bit 0 of 2061 (0: Not reached, 1: Reached). Home Mode 1. Set Pr00-12 to choose how to return home.
• Page 432
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series 15-3-5 DI/DO AI AO are controlled via CANopen To control the DO AO of the motor drive through CANopen, follow the steps below: 1. To set the DO to be controlled, define this DO to be controlled by CANopen. For example, set Pr02-14 to control RY2.
• Page 433
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series P2-20 = 50 2026-41 bit 7 P2-21 = 50 2026-41 bit 8 P2-22 = 50 2026-41 bit 9 P2-23 = 50 2026-41 bit 10 AI： Terminal Related Parameters Mapping Index Value of 2026-61 Value of 2026-62 Value of 2026-63 AO：…
• Page 434
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series 15.4 CANopen Supporting Index C2000 Index: Parameter index corresponds to each other as following: Index sub-Index 2000H + Group member+1 For example: Pr.10.15 (Encoder Slip Error Treatment) Group member 10(0 15(0FH) Index = 2000H + 0AH = 200A…
• Page 435
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series Factory Index Sub Definition Size Note Setting 10B: Operation command by Pr. 00-21 setting 11B: Switch the source of operation command Bit 15 Reserved Freq. command (XXX.XXHz) Bit0 E.F. ON 3 Other trigger Bit1…
• Page 436
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series Factory Index Sub Definition Size Note Setting 2 Display counter value Display actual output frequency (XXX.XXHz) Display DC-BUS voltage (XXX.XV) Display output voltage (XXX.XV) Display output power angle (XX.X°) 7 Display output power in kW…
• Page 437
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series Factory Index Sub Definition Size Note Setting 1B Display GFF in % Display DCbus voltage ripples (Unit: Vdc) Display PLC register D1043 data Display Pole of Permanent Magnet Motor User page displays the value in physical measure 20 Output Value of Pr.00-05…
• Page 438
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series Descriptions Index sub R/W Size Speed Mode Position Mode Home Mode Torque Mode bit DefinitionPriority 0:Power OFF 0:Power OFF 0:Power OFF 0:Power OFF Power 1:Power ON 1:Power ON 1:Power ON 1:Power ON Multi-step Multi-step position…
• Page 439
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series Factory Index Sub Definition R/W Size Unit Mode Note Setting 5 slow down on slow down ramp and stay in QUICK STOP 6 slow down on quick stop ramp and stay in QUICK STOP…
• Page 440
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series 15.5 CANopen Fault Code CANopen CANopen fault Display Fault code Description fault code register (bit 0~7) Fault 0001H Over-current during acceleration 2213 H Oc at accel Fault 0002H Over-current during deceleration 2213 H Oc at decel…
• Page 441
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series CANopen CANopen fault Display Fault code Description fault code register (bit 0~7) Fault DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00 000BH 3220H during acceleration. Lv at accel Fault DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00…
• Page 442
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series CANopen CANopen fault Display Fault code Description fault code register (bit 0~7) Overload. The AC motor drive detects Fault excessive drive output current. 0015H 2310H NOTE: The AC motor drive can withstand up to…
• Page 443
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series CANopen CANopen fault Display Fault code Description fault code register (bit 0~7) Fault Fault 0024H cc (current clamp) hardware error FF07H EoL2 Thermal relay 2 cc HW Error Fault Fault 0025H oc hardware error…
• Page 444
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series CANopen CANopen fault Display Fault code Description fault code register (bit 0~7) External Fault Fault Fault When input EF (N.O.) on external 0031H 9000H EoL2 terminal is closed to GND, AC motor Thermal relay 2 External Fault drive stops output U, V, and W.
• Page 445
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series CANopen CANopen fault Display Fault code Description fault code register (bit 0~7) Fault Fault 003BH Keypad transmission timeout. 7500H cP10 Thermal relay 2 Keypad time out Fault Fault 003CH Brake resistor fault 7110H Thermal relay 2…
• Page 446
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series CANopen CANopen fault Display Fault code Description fault code register (bit 0~7) Fault Fault 0054H W phase output phase loss 2333H OPHL Thermal relay 2 U phase lacked Fault Fault 004FH A phase short…
• Page 447
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview C2000 Series 15.6 CANopen LED Function There are two CANopen flash signs: RUN and ERR. RUN LED: LED status Condition CANopen State Initial Blinking Pre-Operation Single flash Stopped Operation ERR LED: LED status Condition/ State No Error…
• Page 448
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Chapter 16 PLC Function 16.1 PLC Overview 16.2 Precautions for Using PLC 16.3 Start-up 16-3-1 Connect to PC 16-3-2 I/O Device Reference Table 16-3-3 WPLSoft Installation 16-3-4 Program Input 16-3-5 Program Download 16-3-6 Program Monitor 16.4 PLC Ladder Diagram…
• Page 449
  16.1.2 Ladder Diagram Editor – WPLSoft WPLSoft is a program editor of Delta DVP-PLC series and C2000 series for WINDOWS. Besides general PLC program planning and general WINDOWS editing functions, such as cut, paste, copy, multi-windows, WPLSoft also provides various Chinese/English comment editing and other special functions (e.g.
• Page 450
  PLC station using Pr.09-35 but station address must be different to the AC motor drive’s station address (Pr.09-00). C2000 series offers 2 communication ports for PLC program upload and download. Refer to the figure follows for port location. The communication protocol of Channel 1 is always 19200,8,N,2。…
• Page 451
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series When Pr.00-04 is set to 28, D1043 value of PLC register will be displayed on the digital keypad: Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 Digital Keypad KPC-CE01 Display range: 0~65535 Display range: 0~9999 H 0.00Hz A 0.00Hz…
• Page 452
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 16.3 Start-up 16.3.1 The Steps for PLC Execution Please operate PLC functions by following the steps indicate below: Press menu key on KPC-CC01  select 3: PLC  ENTER. MENU F 60.00Hz 1.Pr Setup 1.Disable…
• Page 453
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series PLC Mode PLC Mode select bit1(52) PLC Mode select bit0 (51) Disable (PLC 0) PLC Run (PLC 1) PLC Stop (PLC 2) Previous state When KPC-CE01 execute PLC function: When switching the page from PLC to PLC1, it will execute PLC. The motion of PLC (Execute/Stop) is controlled by WPL editor.
• Page 454
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 16.3.3 WPLSoft Installation Download PLC program toC2000: Refer to D.3 to D.7 for program coding and download the editor (WPLSoft V2.09) at DELTA website http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/ 16.3.4 Program Input 16-7…
• Page 455
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 16.3.5 Program Download Please download the program by following steps: Step 1. Press button for compiler after inputting program in WPLSoft. Step 2. After compiler is finished, choose the item “Write to PLC” in the communication items.
• Page 456
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 16.4 Ladder Diagram 16.4.1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram Read input state from outside Start Calculate the result by ladder diagram algorithm (it doesn’t M100 X3 Repeats the sent to the outer output…
• Page 457
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series In conclusion, each internal storage unit occupies fixed storage unit. When using these equipments, the corresponding content will be read by bit, byte or word. Brief introduction to the internal devices of PLC: Internal Device…
• Page 458
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Internal Device Function PLC needs to handle data and operation when controlling each order, timer value and counter value. The data register is used to store data or parameters. It stores 16-bit binary number, i.e. a word, in each register. It uses two continuous number Data register of data register to store double words.
• Page 459
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Ladder Diagram Explanation Command Device Structure Multiple output none Output command of coil Y, M drive Basic command/ Basic command, Application Application command command Inverse logic none 16.4.3 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram The program edited method is from left power line to right power line.
• Page 460
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series The explanation of command order: The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram LD (LDI) command: give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block. LD command LD command AND Block OR Block The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD.
• Page 461
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series ANB command: a block connects to a device or a block in series. ANB command ORB command: a block connects to a device or a block in parallel. ORB command If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB, they should be combined to blocks or network from up to down or from left to right.
• Page 462
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 16.4.4 The Example for Designing Basic Program Start, Stop and Latching In the same occasions, it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start and stop switch. Therefore, if you want to keep the action, you should design latching circuit. There are…
• Page 463
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series The common control circuit Example 4: condition control X1 and X3 can start/stop Y1 separately, X2 and X4 can start/stop Y2 separately and they are all self latched circuit. Y1 is an element for Y2 to do AND function due to the normally open contact connects to Y2 in series.
• Page 464
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series The figure above is a very simple ladder step diagram. When starting to scan Y1 normally close contact, Y1 normally close contact is close due to the coil Y1 is OFF. Then it will scan Y1 and the coil Y1 will be ON and output 1.
• Page 465
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Example 10: Delay Circuit K1000 TB = 0.1 sec 100 seconds When input X0 is ON, output coil Y1 will be ON at the same time due to the corresponding normally close contact OFF makes timer T10 to be OFF. Output coil Y1 will be OFF after delaying 100 seconds (K1000*0.1 seconds =100 seconds) once input X0 is OFF and T10 is ON.
• Page 466
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 16.5 PLC Devices Function Items Specifications Remarks Stored program, cyclic scan Control Method system Batch processing (when END I/O refresh instruction is I/O Processing Method instruction is executed) available Basic commands (minimum 0.24 Application commands (1 ~…
• Page 467
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 16.5.1 Devices Functions The Function of Input/output Contacts The function of input contact X: input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by connecting with input equipment. It is unlimited usage times for contact A or contact B of each input contact X in program.
• Page 468
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Double Word Word Byte Nibble Octal Number (OCT)  The numbers of external input and output terminal of DVP-PLC use octal number. Example: External input: X0~X7, X10~X17… (device number) External output: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17… (device number) …
• Page 469
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series The Function of Auxiliary Relay There are output coil and A, B contacts in auxiliary relay M and output relay Y. It is unlimited usage times in program. User can control loop by using auxiliary relay, but can’t drive external load directly.
• Page 470
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series  The setting of counter can use constant K or register D (not includes special data register D1000~D1044) to be indirect setting. If using constant K to be setting, it can only be positive number but if setting is data register D, it …
• Page 471
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Special Read(R)/ Function Write(W) M1015 Read only Frequency attained, M1015=On M1016 Parameter read/write error, M1016=On Read only M1017 Succeed to write parameter, M1017 =On Read only M1018 Reserved M1019 Reserved M1020 Zero flag Read only…
• Page 472
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Special Read(R)/ Function Write(W) M1055 Home Read/Write M1056 Power on ready Read only M1057 Reserved M1058 On quick stopping Read only M1059 CANopen master setting complete Read only M1060 Initializing CANopen slave Read only…
• Page 473
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Read(R)/ Special D Function Write(W) D1021 Output current (####.#A) Read only The ID of the extension card: Read only 0: no card D1022 1: Relay Card( 6 out ) 2: I/O Card ( 4 in 2 out )
• Page 474
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Read(R)/ Special D Function Write(W) D1056 Read only Reserved D1059 Mode setting 0: Speed Mode D1060 1: Position Mode Read/Write 2: Torque Mode 3: Homing Mode D1061 Reserved Read/Write D1069 D1100 Tartget frequency Read only…
• Page 475
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Read(R)/ Special D Function Write(W) D1144 D1145 D1146 Status of internal communication node 2 Read only D1147 Reference status L of internal communication node 2 Read only D1148 Reference status H of internal communication node 2…
• Page 476
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Read(R)/ Special D Function Write(W) D1198 Reference status H of internal communication node 7 Read only Read only D1199 (Special D can be written only when PLC is at STOP) CANopen Master Special D…
• Page 477
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Power Failure Factory Special D Function Memor Setting Station number N of a salve station. D2000+100*n Setting range: 0 ~127 0: CANopen function NOT available C2000 supports up to 8 CANopen protocol slaves; each slave occupies 100 of special D register and is numbered in 1~8.
• Page 478
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Basic definition Pre-defined Special D Function setting Index Treatment slave D2006+100*n 6007H-0010H ● ● ● RW communication disconnect D2007+100*n Error code of slave No. n 603FH-0010H ● ● ● D2008+100*n Control word of slave No. n 6040H-0010H D2009+100*n Status word of slave No.
• Page 479
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 20XXH address corresponds to MI MO AI AO. Slave No. n=0~7 Pre-defined Special D Function Setting Index D2026+100*n MI status of slave No. n 2026H-0110H ● D2027+100*n MO setting of slave No. n 2026H-4110H ●…
• Page 480
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Function Code Function Code Description Supported Devices Read coil status Y, M, T, C Read input status X,Y,M,T,C Read one data T,C,D Force changing one coil status Y,M,T,C Write in one data T,C,D Force changing multiple coil status…
• Page 481
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 16.6 Commands 16.6.1 Basic Commands Commands Commands Function Operands Load contact A X, Y, M, T, C Load contact B X, Y, M, T, C Series connection with A contact X, Y, M, T, C…
• Page 482
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Other Command Commands Function Operands No function Inverse operation result Indicator 16.6.2 Explanation for the Command Mnemonic Function Load A contact X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399 Operand      －…
• Page 483
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Mnemonic Function Series connection- A contact X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399 Operand      － The AND command is used in the series connection of A contact. The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first, and then to perform the “AND”…
• Page 484
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Command code: Operation: Ladder diagram: Load contact A of Example Connect to contact A of X1 in parallel Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function Parallel connection- B contact X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399 Operand …
• Page 485
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Command code: Operation: Ladder diagram: Example Load contact A of X0 Block A Connect to contact B of X1 in series Load contact B of X2 Connect to contact A of Block B X3 in series…
• Page 486
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Mnemonic Function Output coil X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399 Operand   － － － － Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device. Motion of coil contact: OUT command…
• Page 487
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Command code: Operation: Ladder diagram Example Load contact A of X0 Clear contact Y5 Mnemonic Function 16-bit timer T0~T159, K0~K32,767 Operand T0~T159, D0~D399 When TMR command is executed, the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to count.
• Page 488
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series When the CNT command is executed from OFFON, which means that the counter coil is driven, and 1 should thus be added to the counter’s value; when the counter achieved specific set value (value of counter = the setting value), motion of the…
• Page 489
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 2. MCR is the main-control ending command that is placed at the end of the main-control program and there should not be any contact commands prior to the MCR command. 3. Commands of the MC-MCR main-control program support the nest program structure, with 8 layers as its greatest.
• Page 490
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series detection status of the acquired contact rising-edge into the accumulative register. Command code: Operation: Example Ladder diagram: Start X0 rising-edge detection Series connection A contact of X1 Drive Y1 coil Please refer to the specification of each model series for the applicable range of Remarks operands.
• Page 491
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Mnemonic Function Falling-edge series connection ANDF X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399 Operand      － ANDF command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ falling-edge detection. Command code:…
• Page 492
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Mnemonic Function Rising-edge output X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399 Operand   － － － － When X0=OFF→ON (rising-edge trigger), PLS command will be executed and M0 will send the pulse of one time which the length is the time needed for one scan cycle.
• Page 493
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Mnemonic Function Program End None Operand It needs to add the END command at the end of ladder diagram program or command program. PLC will scan from address o to END command, after the execution it will return to address 0 and scan again.
• Page 494
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Mnemonic Function Indicator P0~P255 Operand Indicator P allows API 00 CJ command and API 01 CALL command to skip from 0. Though it is not necessary to start from number 0, same number can not be used twice or serious error would occur.
• Page 495
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Mnemonic Codes STEPS Function Command 16-bit 32-bit 16bit 32bit –  Floating Point Zone Operation DEZCP – Compare Degree → Radian – DRAD  – Radian → Degree – DDEG  – – DEADD …
• Page 496
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Mnemonic Codes STEPS Function Command 16-bit 32-bit 16bit 32bit Contact Logical Operation AND^ DAND^ AND# Contact Logical Operation OR& DOR& OR＃ Contact Logical Operation DOR| OR＃ Contact Logical Operation DOR^ OR＃ LD＝ DLD＝ Load Compare LD※…
• Page 497
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Mnemonic Codes STEPS Function Command 16-bit 32-bit 16bit 32bit FOR＜＞ FOR＜＝ FOR＞＝ –  Read the parameters – –  Write the parameters – FPID –  Drive PID control – Special FREQ –…
• Page 498
  － － S: Operand S can designate P. Flag signal: None Operand S of C2000 series can designate P0~P63. 1. S: The pointer of call subroutine. Explanation 2. Edit the subroutine designated by the pointer after FEND instruction. 3. If only CALL instruction is in use, it can call subroutines of the same pointer number with no limit of times.
• Page 499
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series When X1=ON, CALL operation Command procedure Main Program When X1=OFF, operation CALL procedure Main Program Main Program CALL Sub command program Main Program 16-52…
• Page 500
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Compare Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command ( 7 STEPS) H KnX KnY KnM T CMPP ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32bits command (13 STEPS) ＊…
• Page 501
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Zone Compare Bit Devices Word Devices H KnX KnY KnM T 16-bit command (9 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ZCPP ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (17 STEPS) ＊…
• Page 502
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Moving the data 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices MOVP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊…
• Page 503
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Block Move BMOV Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (7 STEPS) H KnX KnY KnM T BMOV BMOVP ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ －…
• Page 504
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series To avoid coincidence of the device numbers to be moved designated by the two Example operands and cause confusion, please be aware of the arrangement on the designated device numbers. When S > D, the BMOV command is processed in the order as →→…
• Page 505
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Remarks Flags and the positive/negative sign of the values: Zero flag Zero flag 16 bit: Zero flag -2, -1, 0 -32,768 -1, 0 32,767 The highest bit The highest bit Borrow flag Carry flag…
• Page 506
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series BIN Multiplication 16-bit command (7 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices MULP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (13 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊…
• Page 507
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series BIN Division Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (7 STEPS) DIVP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (13 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊…
• Page 508
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Increment: BIN plus 1 16-bit command (3 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices INCP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (5 STEPS) Operands: none － － － － Flag signal: none…
• Page 509
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Decrement: BIN minus 1 16-bit command (3 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices DECP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (5 STEPS) Operands: none － － － － Flag signal: none…
• Page 510
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Rotate to the Right Bit Devices Word Devices 16 bit command (5 STEPS) RORP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ － － － － Operands: Flag signal: M1022 Carry flag…
• Page 511
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Rotate to the Left 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices ROLP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ － － － － Operands: D: if in KnY and KnM, only K4 (16-bit) is valid…
• Page 512
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Zero Reset ZRST Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS) H KnX KnY KnM T ZRST ZRSTP ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command Operands: － － －…
• Page 513
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Floating Point Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS) KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ － － － － ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command Operands: DFLT DFLTP No of D operand.
• Page 514
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series MODBUS R/W MODRW Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS) KnX KnY KnM MODRW MODRW ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ Operands: 32-bit command No of D operand. No. of D operand ≦…
• Page 515
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series  S1: Addres of the connecting device. S2: Communication function code. S3: Explanation Address to read data. S: Register to read and write data.  Before using this command, set COM1 to be controlled by PLC(Set Pr09-31 = -12).
• Page 516
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series To control the slave PLC MODRW COMMAND Example Station Add- Registe Function Length code ress Read X0~X3 of slave PLC, total 4 data and H400 save the data read in bit 0~3 of D0..
• Page 517
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series  As the PLC starts to run, M0 = ON will be triggered, and a MODRW command will be executed. Example  If the command is correct and once a reply is sent from the slave, a ROL command will be executed, and then M1 will be ON again.
• Page 518
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Floating Point Compare DECMP Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS) KnX KnY KnM － － － － ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ DECMP DECMPP Operands: D Operands occupy three continuous points.
• Page 519
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Floating Point Zone Compare DEZCP Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS) KnX KnY KnM － － － － ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ DEZCP DEZCPP ＊…
• Page 520
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Degree → Radian 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ DRAD DRADP Operands: Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none range of operands.
• Page 521
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Radian → Degree 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ DDEG DDEGP Operands: Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none range of operands.
• Page 522
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Floating Point Addition EADD Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS) KnX KnY KnM － － － － ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ DEADD DEADDP ＊ ＊ ＊ Operands: Flag signal: none Please refer to the specifications of each model for the range of operands.
• Page 523
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Floating Point Subtraction ESUB 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices KnX KnY KnM － － － － ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ DESUB DESUBP ＊ ＊ ＊ Operands: Flag signal: none Please refer to the specifications of each model for the range of operands.
• Page 524
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Floating Point Multiplication EMUL Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS) KnX KnY KnM － － － － ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ DEMUL DEMULP ＊ ＊ ＊ Operands: Flag signal: none Please refer to the specifications of each model for the range of operands.
• Page 525
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Floating Point Division EDIV 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices KnX KnY KnM － － － － ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ DEDIV DEDIVP ＊ ＊ ＊ Operands: Flag signal: none Please refer to the specifications of each model for the range of operands.
• Page 526
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Float Exponent Operation 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ DEXP DEXPP Operands: Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none range of operands.
• Page 527
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Float Natural Logarithm Operation 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ DLNP Operands: Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none range of operands.
• Page 528
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Floating Point Square Root ESQR 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ DESQR DESQR Operands: Please refer to the specifications of each model for the range of operands.
• Page 529
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Float to Integer 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ 32-bit command ＊ DINT DINTP Operands: Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none range of operands.
• Page 530
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Sine 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ DSIN DSINP Operands: Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none range of operands.
• Page 531
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Cosine 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ DCOS DCOSP Operands: Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none range of operands.
• Page 532
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Tangent 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ DTAN DTANP Operands: Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none range of operands.
• Page 533
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Arc Sine ASIN 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ DASIN DASINP Operands: Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none range of operands.
• Page 534
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Arc Cosine ACOS 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ DACOS DACOS Operands: Please refer to the specifications of each model for the range of operands.
• Page 535
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Art Tangent ATAN 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ DATAN DATANP Operands: Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none range of operands.
• Page 536
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Hyperbolic Sine SINH 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ DSINH DSINHP Operands: Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none range of operands.
• Page 537
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Hyperbolic Cosine COSH 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ DCOSH DCOSHP Operands: Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none range of operands.
• Page 538
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Hyperbolic Tangent TANH 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ DTANH DTANHP Operands: Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none range of operands.
• Page 539
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Comaprison of calendar data TCMP Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS) KnX KnY KnM TCMP TCMPP ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊…
• Page 540
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Comparison of calendar data area TZCP Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS) KnX KnY KnM TZCP TZCPP ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊…
• Page 541
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Calendar data addition TADD 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices TADD TADDP KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ － － － － ＊ ＊ ＊ Operands: Please refer to the specifications of each model for the …
• Page 542
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Calendar data substraction TSUB 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices TSUB TSUBP KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ － － － － ＊ ＊ ＊ Operands:  Flag signal: M1020 (Zero flag)
• Page 543
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Read calendar data 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices TSUB TSUBP KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command Operands: － － － － Please refer to the specifications of each model for the range of operands.
• Page 544
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series BIN→GRAY Code 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices GRYP KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ DGRY DGRYP Operands: Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none …
• Page 545
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series GRAY Code→BIN GBIN 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices GBIN GBINP KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ DGBIN DGBINP Operands:…
• Page 546
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 215~ Contact Logical Operation LD# 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices ZRSTP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊…
• Page 547
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Contact Logical Operation AND# 218~ AND# 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices AND# ZRSTP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS) ＊…
• Page 548
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 221~ Contact Logical operation OR# 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices ZRSTP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊…
• Page 549
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Load Compare※ 224~ LD※ 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices LD※ ZRSTP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32 bits command (9 STEPS) ＊ ＊…
• Page 550
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 232~ AND Compare※ AND※ 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices AND※ ZRSTP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊…
• Page 551
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series OR Compare※ 240~ OR※ 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices OR※ ZRSTP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊…
• Page 552
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Floating Point Contact Type FLD※ 275~ Comparison LD※ 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊ Operand: ＃: &, |, ^ FLD※…
• Page 553
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Floating Point Contact Type Comparison AND※ FAND※ 281~ 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊ Operand: ＃: &, |, ^ FAND※…
• Page 554
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Floating Point Contact Type FOR※ 287~ Comparison OR※ 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices － － － － KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊ Operand: ＃: &, |, ^ FOR※…
• Page 555
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 16.6.5 Description to drive’s special commands Read the AC motor drive’s parameters 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices RPRP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ － －…
• Page 556
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series PID control for the AC motor drive FPID Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (9 STEPS) H KnX KnY KnM T FPID FPIDP ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ － － －…
• Page 557
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Operation control of the AC motor drive FREQ 16-bit command (7 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices FREQ FREQP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ － － －…
• Page 558
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series M1025: controls RUN (On)/STOP (Off) of the drive. M1026: operation direction Example FWD (On)/REV (Off) of the drive. M1015: frequency attained. When M10=ON, setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to K300(3.00Hz) and acceleration/deceleration time is 0.
• Page 559
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Torque Control of AC Motor Drive TORQ 16-bit command (7 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices KnX KnY KnM TORQ TORQ P ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ － － － － Operands: None…
• Page 560
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Point to Point Position Control of AC Motor Drive DPOS 16-bit command (7 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices KnX KnY KnM － － － － ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (5 steps) DPOS DPOSP…
• Page 561
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Read CANopen slave data CANRX 16-bit command (7 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices FREQ FREQP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ － － － － ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊…
• Page 562
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Write CANopen slave data CANTX Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (7 STEPS) H KnX KnY KnM T FREQ FREQP ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ － － －…
• Page 563
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Update the mapping special D of CANopen CANFLS 16-bit command (7 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices FREQ FREQP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ 32-bit command Operands: None － － － － Flag signal: M1028 D: the special D for update.
• Page 564
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Internal Communication Writer ICOMW Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (7 STEPS) ICOMR ICOMRP KnX KnY KnM ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ DICOMR DICOMRP ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ Flag signal: M1077 M1078 M1079 Operands: None Device chosen (0: AC motor drive., 1: Internal PLC)
• Page 565
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 16.7 Error and Troubleshoot Fault Fault Descript Corrective Action PLiC Internal communication signal off Check if shielded wire is properly inserted to communication port COM1. Check if there is error in the program and…
• Page 566
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 16.8 CANopen Master Application Simple control of multiple-axes for certain application can be done by C2000 if the device supports CANopen protocol. One of the C2000 could acts as Master to perform simple synchronous control, e.g.
• Page 567
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series  When the “Register” window appears, click “Transmit”.  When transmission window appear, select “read” and input the range D2000~D2799 then press enter. The value in D2000~D2799 will be read. If communication failed, check the communication format (pre-defined PLC station is 2, 9600, 7N2, ASCII).
• Page 568
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series PDO4 PDO3 PDO2 PDO1 Torque Position Remote I/O Speed 14 ~ 12 10 ~ 8 6 ~ 4 2 ~ 0 Definition En Number Number Number Number The pre-defined setting of PDO 3 TX has corresponded to CANopen control word “Index 6040”and CANopen target position”…
• Page 569
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Step 3: Set up Master station number and communication speed. Set up the station number for the Master (the default setting of Pr.09-46=100). Do not  to set the same station number as the Slave.
• Page 570
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Step 5: Setting the Slave station number, communication speed, operation source and command source CANopen communication is supported by Delta C2000 series and EC series AC motor drive. The corresponding slave and CANopen speed are shown as below: Corresponding…
• Page 571
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Step 6: Hardware connection The terminating resistor must be installed at the two farthest ends as shown in the figure below: Characteristic Characteristic line impedance line impedance Step 7: Activate PLC Control Function Download the program after coding is complete and switch PLC mode to Run status. Then reboots the power for Slave and Master.
• Page 572
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Set up CANopen communication speed to 1 M (parameter Pr.09-37= 0). It does not  matter if the drive is defined as a Master or a Slave, communication speed is set by Pr.09-37 in both case.
• Page 573
  PG offset angle process after auto-tuning. Please refer to Pr.12-58 and Pr.05-00 for more detail. ※ Set up Delta ECMA series PM motor by enter motor parameters, follow the motor parameters shown in Delta Servo Motor Catalogue. It is not required to execute auto-tuning for using Delta ECMA series PM motors.
• Page 574
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Special D Descriptions D1050 Actual mode (0:Speed, 1: Position, 2: Torque, 3: Homing) Control command for Speed Mode: FREQ(P) Target speed 1st step accel. time 1st step decel. time Example of Speed Control Mode: If the drive is in FOC control mode, please auto-tuning the motor before setting PLC control mode to speed control.
• Page 575
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Torque Control: The corresponding registers for Torque Mode are listed in the chart below: Special M Control Setting Special M Description M1040 Power ON Special M Status Special M Description M1056 Power ON ready…
• Page 576
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series M1002 D1060 ON only for 1scan a Set control mode (0:V) M1000 Normally open contact Power on delay Power on delay Ready K1000 TORQ K100 Set Torque TORQ K-200 K1000 Set Torque Ready Power on…
• Page 577
  (MI=44 is for reverse run limit, MI=45 is for forward run limit and MI=46 is for homing to origin point). C2000 series AC motor drive only supports Z phase homing to origin point, please choose an Encoder with Z phase.
• Page 578
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series When setting D1060 = 3, AC motor drive is in homing mode. When setting M1040 = 1, AC motor drive power turns ON. When setting M1055=1, AC motor drive search for origin point. When homing is complete, M1070 will be ON. Then set D1060=1 to switch control mode to position mode.
• Page 579
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Part III (Point to Point Position Control): Switch control mode to Position Mode (D1060=1) and motor will be running forward and reverse between the position setting(+300000 ~ -300000 ). P2P mode M101 D1060 P2P mode…
• Page 580
  CANopen communication. This communication protocol is available for C2000 series and CT2000 series AC motor drives only and the way it functions is similar to Master/Slave control. A master drive could control a maximum of 8 slaves and the master/slave setting process is very simple.
• Page 581
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 16-134…
• Page 582
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series PLC Programming for Master Drive Control In PLC program, D1110 is used for assigning the slave drive user wishes to control. The range setting for D1110 is 1~8 (if D1110 is set to 0 slave 8 is assigned).
• Page 583
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Special D Description Slave 2, …, bit7= Slave Description Special D Definition Definition Definition Frequency Attained Position Attained Torque Attained Homing Completed Forward Run Forward Run Forward Run Forward Run Reverse Run Reverse Run…
• Page 584
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Diagram 2: When Slave 1 on-line status is detected, it will delay for 3 seconds before control command is enabled. M700 D1121 MOVP Node 0 online Internal node control mode Enable Control Delay ( M100 )
• Page 585
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 16-11 Counting Function via MI8 The Multi-function Input Terminal (MI8) can be used for single direction Pulse counting and provides a maximum speed of 100K. To initiate MI8 for counting, simply set M1038 to ON and the count value will be saved to D1054 and D1055 in 32bit signed decimal.
• Page 586
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 16-12 Remote IO Control Application of MODBUS (using Modbus) C2000 internal PLC supports reading and writing of 485, and it is realized by MODRW command. But before programming, it is necessary to define the serial as PLC 485, which sets P09-31 = -12. After setting, standard Function defined by 485 can be used to read or write command to other nodes.
• Page 587
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Example program：Each function testing The first command will be transfer timing when turning on. M1002 K4M0 On only for 1 scan a When feedback is finished without error, switch to next command M1077 M1078 M1079…
• Page 588
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series To control RTU-485. Step 1：Set communication protocol, assuming communication protocol is 115200，8,N,2，RTU C2000：PLC default node is 2 (9-35) 9-31=-12(COM1 controlled by PLC)，9-01=115.2 (communication speed is 115200) 9-04=13( protocol is 8,N,2，RTU) RTU485：node = 8 (example)
• Page 589
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Step 2: Setting controlled equipments. We can connect DVP16-SP(8 IN 8 OUT), DVP-04AD (4 channels AD)、DVP02DA(2 channels DA) and DVP-08ST(8 switches) to RTU 485 sequentially. With RTU485 definition, correspond terminals as below: DVP-04AD(4 channels AD)、DVP02DA(2 channels DA) 和…
• Page 590
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Step 4：Programming PLC 16-143…
• Page 591
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 16-144…
• Page 592
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series Step 5：Real action: I/O testing：Toggling Switch, the corresponding reaction of M115 ~ M108 can be observed. In addition, the signals of output can be also observed (every one second add 1) (Binary display) This light signal increase by 1number per second.
• Page 593
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 16-146…
• Page 594
  Chapter 16 PLC Function C2000 Series 16-147…
• Page 595
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series Chapter 17 How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive 17-1 Capacity formula 17-2 General Precautions 17-3 How to choose a suitable motor The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence on its lifetime.
• Page 596
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 17-1 Capacity Formulas When one AC motor drive operates one motor The starting capacity should be less than 1.5x rated capacity of AC motor drive The starting capacity=     …
• Page 597
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 2.3 When it is running continuously  The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive(kVA) The requirement of load capacity=   capacity motor drive …
• Page 598
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 17-2 General Precaution Selection Note 1. When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer (600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents may occur in the power input circuit and the converter section may be damaged.
• Page 599
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsC2000 Series 17-3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor Standard motor When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3-phase induction motor, take the following precautions: 1. The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor.
• Page 600
  3. Explosion-proof (Ex) motor: Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the (Ex) requirements. Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for (Ex) areas with special precautions. 4. Gear reduction motor: The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation will be different and depending on brand.
• Page 601
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives C2000 Series Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives 18-1 Maintenance and Inspections 18-2 Greasy Dirt Problem 18-3 Fiber Dust Problem 18-4 Erosion Problem 18-5 Industrial Dust Problem…
• Page 602
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives C2000 Series 18-1 Maintenance and Inspections Before the check-up, always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover. Wait at least 10 minutes after all display lamps have gone out, and then confirm that the capacitors have fully discharged by measuring the voltage between DC+ and DC-.
• Page 603
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives C2000 Series Main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Half Daily Year Year ○ If there are any loose or missing screws Tighten or replace the screw…
• Page 604
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives C2000 Series Transformer and reactor of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Half Daily Year Year If there is any abnormal vibration or peculiar Visual, aural inspection and ○…
• Page 605
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives C2000 Series Ventilation channel of cooling system Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Half Daily Year Year ○ If there is any obstruction in the heat sink, air…
• Page 606
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives C2000 Series 18-2 Greasy Dirt Problem Serious greasy dirt problems generally occur in processing industries such as machine tools, punching machines and so on. Please be aware of the possible damages that greasy oil may cause…
• Page 607
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives C2000 Series 18-3 Fiber Dust Problem Serious fiber dust problems generally occur in the textile industry. Please be aware of the possible damages that fiber may cause to your drives: Fiber that accumulates or adheres to the fans will lead to poor ventilation and cause overheating problems.
• Page 608
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives C2000 Series 18-4 Erosion Problem Erosion problems may occur if any fluids flow into the drives. Please be aware of the damages that erosion may cause to your drive.
• Page 609
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives C2000 Series 18-5 Industrial Dust Problem Serious industrial dust pollution frequently occurs in stone processing plants, flour mills, cement plants, and so on. Please be aware of the possible damage that industrial dust may cause to your…
• Page 610
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives C2000 Series 18-6 Wiring and Installation Problem When wiring the drive, the most common problem is wrong wire installation or poor wiring. Please be aware of the possible damages that poor wiring may cause to your drives: Screws are not fully fastened.
• Page 611
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives C2000 Series 18-7 Multi-function Input/Output Terminals Problem Multi-function input/output terminal errors are generally caused by over usage of terminals and not following specifications. Please be aware of the possible damages that errors on multi-function input/output terminals may cause to your drives: Input/output circuit may burns out when the terminal usage exceeds its limit.
• Page 612
  AC Motor Drives EMC Standard Installation Guide EMC Compliance Practice…
• Page 613
  Preface When an AC motor drive is installed in a noisy environment, radiated and/or conducted noise via signal and power cables can interfere with the correct functioning, cause errors or even damage to the drive. To prevent this, some AC motor drives have an enhanced noise resistance but the results are limited and it is not economical.
• Page 614
  Table of Contents Preface ……………………i Table of Contents………………..ii Chapter 1 Introduction……………….. 1 1.1 What is EMC ………………… 1 1.2 EMC for AC Motor Drive …………….1 Chapter 2 How to prevent EMI …………….2 2.1 Types of EMI: common-mode and differential mode noise ……. 2 2.2 How does EMI transmit? (Noise transmission) ………
• Page 616
  Installing the AC motor drive accurately will decrease EMI influences and ensure long term stability of the electricity system. It is strongly suggested to follow Delta’s user manual for wiring and grounding. If any difficulties or problems arise, please follow the instructions and measures as indicated in this EMC…
• Page 617
  Chapter 2 How to prevent EMI 2.1 Types of EMI: Common-mode and differential-mode noise The electromagnetic noise of an AC motor drive can be distinguished into common-mode and differential- mode noise. Differential-mode noise is caused by the stray capacitance between the conducting wires and common-mode noise is caused by the common-mode coupling current path created by the stray capacitance between the conducting wires and ground.
• Page 618
  Unshielded cable Noise Cstray Power System Cable supply Ground 3. Common-mode noise is coupled via the power cable to other power systems then the cable of such a power system is coupled to the transmission system, as shown in Figure 3. Unshielded cable Noise Cstray…
• Page 619
  Chapter 3 Solution to EMI: Grounding The leakage current of an electronic equipment is conducted to ground via the grounding wire and the ground electrode. According to Ohm’s law, potential differences may arise when the electrode’s ground and the ground’s ground resistance are different. According to Ohm’s law, the earth resistance for electrode and the ground are different, in this case potential differences may arise.
• Page 620
  Painted sheet metal 3.2 Ground Loops A ground loop occurs when the pieces of equipment are connected to more than one grounding path. In this case, the ground current may return to the grounding electrode via more than one path. There are three methods to prevent ground loops 1.
• Page 621
  TN system TN: The neutral point of the low voltage transformer or generator is earthed, usually the star point in a three-phase system. The body of the electrical device is connected to earth via this earth connection at the transformer. protective earth (PE): The conductor that connects the exposed metallic parts of the consumer.
• Page 622
  Generator or transformer Earth Consumer TN-C-S system TN-C-S: A combined earth and neutral system (PEN conductor) is used in certain systems but eventually split up into two separate conductors PE and N. A typical application of combined PEN conductor is from the substation to the building but within the building PEN is separated into the PE and N conductors.
• Page 623
  IT system IT: The neutral point of the transformer and electrical equipment are not earthed, only the equipment frames PE are earthed. In the IT network, the power distribution system Neutral is either not connected to earth or is earthed via a high impedance.
• Page 624
  Chapter 4 Solution to EMI: Shielding 4.1 What is Shielding? Electrostatic shielding is used to isolate equipment so that it will not create electromagnetic field interference or be influenced by an external electromagnetic field. A conductive material is used for electrostatic shielding to achieve this isolation.
• Page 625
  Electromagnetic fields Wall of (depth) shielded Greater leakage enclosure (gap) form bigger apertures «Waveguide below cut-off» doesn’t leak very much G=gap ( ap er tu re d im en sio n) (does not have to be a tube) d=depth Shield in g ef fectiveness ( distan ce that fields ( SE)in dB have to travel)
• Page 626
  Electrical Cabinet Design In a high frequency electric field, shielding can be achieved by painting a thin layer of conductive metal on the enclosure or on the internal lining material. However, the coating must be thorough and all parts should be properly covered without any seams or gaps (just like a Faraday cage). That is only the ideal. Making a seamless shielding shell is practically impossible since the cage is composed of metal parts.
• Page 627
  The filter and the AC drive should be installed in the control cabinet or on the mounting plate that is earthed to ground. The motor cable must be shielded and as short as possible. Please use the filters recommended by Delta to ensure compliance with EMC standards. The Shielded…
• Page 628
  AC Motor Drives with Built-in Filter 1. Since interferences are suppressed by installing an earthed capacitor in the filter, the amount of current to ground (leakage current) could result in electric shocks to personnel or the power system. Please be aware of this problem. 2.
• Page 629
  Analog Input Signals If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, please connect a capacitor and a ferrite core as indicated in the following diagram. Wind the wires around the core in same direction for 3 times or more. AVI/ACI/AUI Ferrite core Harmonic Interference…
• Page 630
  DC Reactor A DC-Reactor is installed between the rectifier and the DC-bus capacitor to suppress harmonic currents and to achieve a higher power factor. Current Wave Diagrams Without Reactor With Reactor -100 -100 -150 -150 250 300 400 450 250 300 400 450…

Quick Links

• Page 2
  30 °C. Storage longer than one year is not recommended, it could result in the degradation of the electrolytic capacitors. NOTE The content of this manual may be revised without prior notice. Please consult our distributors or download the most updated version at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation…

• Page 3: Table Of Contents

  Table of Contents CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION ………………..1-1 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ………………..2-1 CHAPTER 3 UNPACKING ………………….3-1 CHAPTER 4 WIRING ……………………4-1 CHAPTER 5 MAIN CIRCUIT TERMINALS …………….5-1 CHPATER 6 CONTROL TERMINALS ………………6-1 CHAPTER 7 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES …………….7-1 CHAPTER 8 OPTION CARDS ………………..

• Page 4: Group

  Summary of Updates|C2000 Series Publication History The following changes summarize the differences to the C2000 Simplified Manual, Version 5011694702. Chatpers Changes Detail [Table of Content] New Chapters: • Chapter 2 Installation • Chapter 7 Optional Accessories • Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings •…

• Page 5
  Pr.05-05~05-09, 05-018~05-21 Group 06 Pr.06-48, 06-69, 06-70 Group 07 Pr.07-05 Group 08 Pr.08-00, 08-06 Group 09 Pr.09-04, 09-31, 09-43 Group 10 Pr.10-31~10-42 Group 11 Pr.11-02, 11-13, 11-39, 11-42 Pr. 02-55~02-58, [13 Warning Codes] PLra [14 Fault Codes and Fault code: Descriptions] “ryF”…
• Page 6
  Heavy Duty: 3PH 0- 480 V 2.9A 2.3KVA 1 HP Frequ ency Range FREQUENCY RANGE: Normal Duty: 0-600Hz Heavy Duty: 0-300Hz Firmware Versio n VX.XX Version: Certifications Encl osure type (IPXX) Serial Number 007 C4 3A7T9300 002 DELTA E LEC TRONIC S. INC . MAD E IN XXXXXXX…
• Page 7
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series Model Name VFD 007 C 43 A Versi on ty pe Inpu t vo ltage 23:2 30V 3-PHASE 43:4 60V 3-PHASE C2000 serie s Appli cabl e motor capacity 007 :1HP(0.75 kW)~ 3350:475HP(335kW Refer to the specifications for detail s…
• Page 8
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series RFI Jumper RFI Jumper: The AC motor drive may emit the electrical noise. The RFI jumper is used to suppress the interference (Radio Frequency Interference) on the power line. Frame A~C Screw Torque: 8 ~10kg-cm(6.9-8.7 lb -in.) Loosen the screws and remove the MOV-PLATE.
• Page 9
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series Frame D~H Remove the MOV-PLATE by hands, no screws need to be loosen. Main power isolated from earth: If the AC motor drive is supplied from an isolated power (IT power), the RFI jumper must be cut off. Then the RFI capacities (filter capacitors) will be disconnected from ground to prevent circuit damage (according to IEC 61800-3) and reduce earth leakage current.
• Page 10
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series Dimensions Frame A VFD007C23A; VFD007C43A/E; VFD015C23A; VFD015C43A/E; VFD022C23A; VFD022C43A/E; VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/E; VFD040C43A/E; VFD055C43A/E Unit: mm [inch] Frame Φ1 Φ2 Φ3 130.0 250.0 170.0 116.0 236.0 45.8 22.2 34.0 28.0 [5.12] [9.84] [6.69] [4.57] [9.29] [1.80] [0.24] [0.87]…
• Page 11
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series Frame B VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD075C43A/E; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/E; VFD150C43A/E See Detail A See Detail B Detail A (Mounting Hole) Detail B (Mounting Hole) Unit: mm [inch] Frame Φ1 Φ2 Φ3 190.0 320.0 190.0 173.0 303.0 77.9 22.2 34.0…
• Page 12
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series Frame C VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD185C43A/E; VFD220C23A; VFD220C43A/E; VFD300C43A/E See Detail A See Detail B Detail A (Mounting Hole) Detail B (Mounting Hole) Unit: mm [inch] Frame Φ1 Φ2 Φ3 250.0 400.0 210.0 231.0 381.0 92.9 22.2 34.0…
• Page 13
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series Frame D D1: VFD300C23A; VFD370C23A; VFD370C43A; VFD450C43A; VFD550C43A; VFD750C43A SEE DETAIL A SEE DETAIL B DETAIL B DETAIL A (MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE) Unit: mm [inch] Φ1 Φ2 Φ3 Frame 330.0 275.0 285.0 550.0 525.0 492.0 107.2…
• Page 14
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series D2: VFD300C23E; VFD370C23E; VFD370C43E; VFD450C43E; VFD550C43E; VFD750C43E SEE DETAIL A SEE DETAIL B DETAIL A DETAIL B (MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE) Unit: mm [inch] Frame Φ1 Φ2 Φ3 330.0 688.3 275.0 285.0 550.0 525.0 492.0 107.2 16.0…
• Page 15
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series Frame E E1: VFD450C23A; VFD550C23A; VFD750C23A; VFD900C43A; VFD1100C43A Unit: mm [inch] Frame S1, S2 ψ1 ψ2 ψ3 370.0 300.0 335.0 560.0 528.0 143.0 18.0 13.0 18.0 [14.57] [11.81] [13.19 [23.19] [22.05] [20.80] [5.63] [0.71] [0.51] [0.71]…
• Page 16
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series Frame E E2: VFD450C23E; VFD550C23E; VFD750C23E; VFD900C43E; VFD1100C43E Unit: mm [inch] Frame S1, S2 ψ1 ψ2 ψ3 370.0 715.8 300.0 335.0 560.0 528.0 143.0 18.0 13.0 18.0 22.0 34.0 92.0 [14.57] [28.18] [11.81] [13.19 [23.19] [22.05] [20.80]…
• Page 17
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series Frame F F1: VFD900C23A; VFD1320C43A; VFD1600C43A See Detail A See Detail B Detail A (Mounting Hole) Detail B (Mounting Hole) Unit: mm [inch] Frame 420.0 300.0 380.0 800.0 770.0 717.0 124.0 18.0 13.0 25.0 18.0 [16.54] [11.81]…
• Page 18
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series Frame F F2: VFD900C23E; VFD1320C43E; VFD1600C43E See Detail A See Detail B Detail A (Mounting Hole) Detail B (Mounting Hole) Unit: mm [inch] Frame 420.0 940.0 300.0 380.0 800.0 770.0 717.0 124.0 18.0 13.0 25.0 18.0 [16.54]…
• Page 19
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series Frame G G1: VFD1850C43A; VFD2200C43A Unit: mm [inch] Frame ψ1 ψ2 ψ3 500.0 397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0 26.5 27.0 [19.69] [15.63] [217.32] [39.37] [37.91] [35.97] [0.51] [1.04] [1.06] 1-14…
• Page 20
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series Frame G G2: VFD1850C43E; VFD2200C43E Unit: mm [inch] Frame ψ1 ψ2 ψ3 500.0 1240.2 397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0 26.5 27.0 22.0 34.0 117.5 [19.69] [48.83] [15.63] [217.32] [39.37] [37.91] [35.97] [0.51] [1.04] [1.06] [0.87] [1.34]…
• Page 21
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series Frame H H1: VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A Unit: mm [inch] Frame 700.0 398.0 290.0 1346.6 1435.0 630.0 1403.0 [56.5] [24.8] [55.24] [27.56] [15.67] [11.42] [53.02] Frame ψ1 ψ2 ψ3 45.0 13.0 26.5 25.0 [1.77] [0.51] [1.04] [0.98]…
• Page 22
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series Frame H H2: VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1 Unit: mm [inch] Frame 700.0 1745.0 404.0 630.0 760.0 800.0 1729.0 500.0 630.0 1701.6 [19.69] [24.8] [66.99] [27.56] [68.70] [15.91] [24.8] [29.92] [31.5] [68.07] Frame Φ Φ Φ 51.0 38.0 65.0…
• Page 23
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series Frame H H3: VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E Unit: mm [inch] Frame 700.0 1745.0 404.0 630.0 760.0 800.0 1729.0 500.0 630.0 1701.6 [27.56] [68.70] [15.91] [24.8] [19.69] [24.8] [29.92] [31.5] [68.07] [66.99] Frame Φ Φ Φ 51.0 38.0 65.0…
• Page 24
  Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 1-19…
• Page 25
  Chapter 2 Installation|C2000 Series Chapter 2 Installation Minimum Mounting Clearance and Installation NOTE Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, shredded wood saw dust, metal particles, etc. from adhereing to the heat sink Install the AC motor drive in a metal cabinet. When installing one drive below another one, use a metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating and to prevent the risk of fire accident.
• Page 26
  Chapter 2 Installation|C2000 Series Multiple drives, side-by-side installation (Frame D, E, F) Install metal separation between the drives. Multiple drives side-by-side installation and in rows (Frame A,B,C ) Ta: Frame A~G Ta*: Frame H When installing one AC motor drive below another one (top-bottom installation), use a metal separation between the drives to prevent mutual heating.
• Page 27
  Chapter 2 Installation|C2000 Series Frame E VFD450C23A/E; VFD550C23A/E; VFD750C23A/E; VFD900C43A/E; VFD1100C43A/E Frame F VFD900C23A/E; VFD1320C43A/E; VFD1600C43A/E Frame G VFD1850C43A; VFD2200C43A; VFD1850C43E; VFD2200C43E Frame H VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A; VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1;VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E NOTE 1. The minimum mounting clearances stated in the table above applies to AC motor drives frame A to D. A drive fails to follow the minimum mounting clearances may cause the fan to malfunction and heat dissipation problem.
• Page 28
  Chapter 2 Installation|C2000 Series VFD037C43A/E VFD040C43A/E VFD055C43A/E VFD075C43A/E VFD110C43A/E VFD150C43A/E VFD185C43A/E VFD220C43A/E VFD300C43A/E VFD370C43A/E VFD450C43A/E 1147 VFD550C43A/E 1156 1413 Power dissipation of AC motor Air flow rate for cooling drive Flow Rate (cfm) Flow Rate (m /hr) Power Dissipation Model No.

• Page 29: Chapter 2 Installation

  Chapter 2 Installation|C2000 Series Derating Curve Diagram of Normal Duty (Pr.00-16=0) Set Pr.06-55 = 1 Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2 (40℃: UL open-type) Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2 (30℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size) (50℃: UL open-type) (40℃:UL type1 or open type_size by size)

• Page 30
  Chapter 2 Installation|C2000 Series Derating Curve Diagram of Heavy Duty (Pr.00-16=1) Set Pr.06-55 = 1 Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2 (40℃: UL open-type) Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2 (30℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size) (50℃: UL open-type) (40℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size)

• Page 31: Chapter 3 Unpacking

  Chapter 3 Unpacking|C2000 Series Chapter 3 Unpacking The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to retain the warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for an extended period of time.

• Page 32
  Chapter 3 Unpacking|C2000 Series Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Loosen the 10 screws on the pallet, remove the ready for installation. wooden plate. Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation.
• Page 33
  Chapter 3 Unpacking|C2000 Series Remove the crate cover, EPEs and manual. Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubbers and manual. Loosen the 8 screws on the pallet as shown in the Loosen the 10 screws on the pallet and remove the following figure.
• Page 34
  Chapter 3 Unpacking|C2000 Series Frame F Crate 1 (VFDXXXCXXA) Crate 2 (VFDXXXCXXE) Remove the 6 clips on the side of the crate with a Remove the 6 clips on the side of the crate with a flat-head screwdriver. (As shown in figure below.) flat-head screwdriver.
• Page 35
  Chapter 3 Unpacking|C2000 Series Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation ready for installation. Frame G Crate 1 (VFDXXXCXXA) Crate 2 (VFDXXXCXXE)
• Page 36
  Chapter 3 Unpacking|C2000 Series Loosen the 5 screws as shown in following figure: Loosen the 9 screws and remove the wooden plate. wood plate1 wood plate2 wood plate3 wood plate5 wood plate4 Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole.
• Page 37
  Chapter 3 Unpacking|C2000 Series Remove the crate cover, EPEs and manual. Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubbers and manual. Loosen the 6 screws on the top then remove 6 Loosen the 6 screws on the top then remove 6 metal washers and 6 plastic washers as shown in metal washers and 6 plastic washers as shown in figure below.
• Page 38
  Chapter 3 Unpacking|C2000 Series Secure the drive from the external. (Skip to the next step if this situation does not apply to you.) Loosen 8 of M8 screws on the both sides and place the 2 plates that were removed from the last step.
• Page 39
  Chapter 3 Unpacking|C2000 Series Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubber and manual. Loosen the 6 screws on the cover, remove 6 metal washers and 6 plastic washers as shown in below: Loosen 6 of the M6 screws on the side and removes the 2 plates, as shown in following figure. The…
• Page 40
  Chapter 3 Unpacking|C2000 Series Secure the drive from the internal. Secure the drive from the external. Loosen 18 of the M6 screws and remove the top Loosen 8 of the M8 screws on the both sides and cover as shown in figure 2. Mount the cover (figure…
• Page 41
  Chapter 3 Unpacking|C2000 Series Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation. Frame H Secure the drive (VFDXXXCXXA) Screw: M12*6 Torque: 340-420kg-cm [295.1-364.6lb-in.] 3-11…
• Page 42
  Chapter 3 Unpacking|C2000 Series (VFDXXXCXXE) & (VFDXXXCXXE-1) Secure the drive from the internal. Screw: M12*8 Torque: 340-420kg-cm [295.1-364.6lb-in.] Secure the drive from the external. Screw: M12*8 Torque: 340-420kg-cm [295.1-364.6lb-in.] 3-12…
• Page 43
  Chapter 3 Unpacking|C2000 Series The Lifting Hook The arrows indicate the location of the lifting holes of frame D to H, as shown in figure below: Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 3-13…
• Page 44
  Chapter 3 Unpacking|C2000 Series Ensure the lifting hook properly goes through the Ensure the angle between the lifting holes and the lifting hole, as shown in the following diagram. lifting device is within the specification, as shown (Applicable to Frame D~E) in the following figure.
• Page 45
  Chapter 3 Unpacking|C2000 Series Weight VFDXXXXCXXA VFDXXXXCXXE 37.6 kg(82.9 Ibs.) 40 kg(88.2 Ibs.) VFDXXXXCXXA VFDXXXXCXXE 63.6 kg(140.2 Ibs.) 66 kg(145.5 Ibs.) VFDXXXXCXXA 85kg(187.2 Ibs.) 88kg(193.8 Ibs.) VFDXXXXCXXE VFDXXXXCXXA 130kg(286.5 Ibs.) VFDXXXXCXXE 138kg(303.9 lbs) VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A 235kg (518.1lbs) H2: VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1 257kg (566.6lbs)
• Page 46
  Chapter 3 Unpacking|C2000 Series H3: VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E 263kg (579.8lbs) 3-16…

• Page 47: Drives

  Chapter 4 Wiring|C2000 Series Chapter 4 Wiring After removing the front cover, examine if the power and control terminals are clearly noted. Please read following precautions before wiring. Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 terminals. Failure to comply may result in damage to the equipments.

• Page 48
  Chapter 4 Wiring|C2000 Series Wiring Diagram for Frame A~C DC choke Br ak e res istor (optional) * It pr ovides 3-phase power (optional) Jumper F us e/NF B(No F use B reaker) R (L1) R(L1) Motor U(T 1) S(L2)
• Page 49
  Chapter 4 Wiring|C2000 Series Wiring Diagram for Fra me D a nd Frames Abov e * It pr ovides 3-phase power Please ref er to f igure 3 -/DC — +/D C+ F us e/NF B(No F use Breaker) R(L1)
• Page 50
  Chapter 4 Wiring|C2000 Series Figure 1 In put power t erminals for frame G a nd H It prov ides 12 -p ulse power Prov ides 3-p has e po we r R/L11 Fus e or NFB (non-f use break er)
• Page 51
  NOTE Common DC Bus can only be applied to the drives with same power range. If in your case the drives are in different power range, please contact with us (Delta Industrial Automation Business Unit).

• Page 52: Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals

  Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C2000 Series Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals Main Circuit Diagram 1 For frame A~C Brake resis tor (optio nal) * Provid e 3-ph ase input power Jumper Fuse/NFB(No F use Breaker) R(L1) U(T1) Motor R(L1) S(L2)

• Page 53
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C2000 Series Main Circuit Diagram 3 Po we r input te rm in als o f f rame G and H It prov ides 12 -pulse rec tifier Provides 3-p has e po we r Fus e or NFB (non-f us e brea ker)
• Page 54
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C2000 Series Run/stop AC motor drives by RUN/STOP command via control terminals or keypad. If you still need to run/stop AC motor drives by turning power ON/OFF, it is recommended to do so only ONCE per hour.
• Page 55
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C2000 Series brake torque. When the terminals +1, +2 and — are not used, please leave the terminals open. DO NOT connect [+1, -], [+2, -], [+1/DC+, -/DC-] or brake resistor directly to prevent drive damage.
• Page 56
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C2000 Series 5-1 Main Circuit Terminals Frame A Main circuit terminals: R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , B1, B2, +1, +2, — Max. Wire Torque Models Min. Wire Gauge Gauge (±10%) VFD007C23A 14 AWG (2.1mm VFD015C23A 12 AWG (3.3mm…
• Page 57
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C2000 Series Frame B Main circuit terminals: R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , B1, B2, +1, +2, — Max. Wire Torque Models Min. Wire Gauge Gauge (±10%) VFD055C23A 8 AWG (8.4mm VFD075C23A 6 AWG (13.3mm VFD110C23A 4 AWG (21.2mm…
• Page 58
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C2000 Series Frame C Main circuit terminals: R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , B1, B2, +1, +2, — Max. Wire Torque Models Min. Wire Gauge Gauge (±10%) VFD150C23A 1 AWG (42.4mm VFD185C23A 1/0 AWG (53.5mm VFD220C23A 1/0 AWG (53.5mm…
• Page 59
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C2000 Series Frame D Main circuit terminals: R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , +1/DC+, -/DC- Max. Wire Torque Models Min. Wire Gauge Gauge (±10%) VFD300C23A 4/0 AWG (107mm VFD370C23A 250MCM (127mm VFD370C43A 300MCM 1/0 AWG (53.5mm…
• Page 60
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C2000 Series Frame E Main circuit terminals: R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , +1/DC+, -/DC- Max. Wire Torque Models Min. Wire Gauge Gauge (±10%) VFD450C23A 1/0AWG*2 (53.5mm VFD550C23A 3/0AWG*2 (85mm 300MCM*2 VFD750C23A 4/0 AWG*2 (107mm…
• Page 61
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C2000 Series Frame F Main circuit terminals: R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, -/DC- Max. Wire Torque Models Min. Wire Gauge Gauge (±10%) VFD900C23A 300MCM*2 (152mm 300MCM*2 VFD1320C43A 4/0 AWG*2 (107mm (152mm VFD1600C43A 300MCM*2 (152mm 200kg-cm (173 lb-in.)
• Page 62
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C2000 Series Frame G Main circuit terminals: R/L11, R/L12, S/L21, S/L22, T/L31, T/L32 Max. Wire Torque Models Min. Wire Gauge Gauge (±10%) VFD1850C43A 2/0AWG*4 (67.4mm VFD2200C43A 3/0AWG*4 (85mm 300MCM*4 200kg-cm (173 lb-in.) (152mm VFD1850C43E 1/0AWG*4 (53.5mm (19.62Nm)
• Page 63
  Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C2000 Series Frame H Main circuit terminals: R/11,R12,S/21,S/22,T/31,T/32, V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, U/T1, -/DC- Max. Wire Torque Models Min. Wire Gauge Gauge (±10%) VFD2800C43A 4/0 AWG*4 (107mm VFD3150C43A 300MCM*4 (152mm VFD3550C43A 300MCM*4 (152mm VFD2800C43E-1 3/0 AWG*4 (85mm…
• Page 64
  Chapter 6 Control Terminals|C2000 Series Chapter 6 Control Terminals Please remove the top cover before wiring the multi-function input and output terminals, The drive appearances shown in the figures are for reference only, a real drive may look different. Remove the cover for wiring. Frame A~H Frame A&B…
• Page 65
  Chapter 6 Control Terminals|C2000 Series Frame G Screw torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.] To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward Frame H Screw torque: 14~16Kg-cm [12.15~13.89lb-in.] To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward 0-1 0V 0-1 0V…
• Page 66
  Chapter 6 Control Terminals|C2000 Series Wiring precautions: Reserves 5mm and properly install the wire into the terminal; fasten the installation by a slotted screwdriver. If the wire is stripped, sort the wire before install into the terminal. Flathead screwdriver: blade width 3.5mm, tip thickness 0.6mm In the figure above, the factory setting for S1-SCM is short circuit.
• Page 67
  Chapter 6 Control Terminals|C2000 Series Terminals Terminal Function Factory Setting (NPN mode) Analog frequency setting: -10Vdc 20mA Potentiometer power supply -10V Analog voltage input +10V AVI circuit Impedance: 20kΩ Range: 4 ~ 20mA/0~10V =0~Max. Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) AVI switch, factory setting is 0~10V…
• Page 68
  Chapter 6 Control Terminals|C2000 Series Analog input terminals (AVI, ACI, AUI, ACM) Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and keep it as short as possible (<20m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive, connecting the shield to terminal ACM can bring improvement.

• Page 69: Chapter 7 Optional Accessories

  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series Chapter 7 Optional Accessories The optional accessories listed in this chapter are available upon request. Installing additional accessories to your drive would substantially improves the drive’s performance. Please select an applicable accessory according to your need or contact the local distributor for suggestion.

• Page 70
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives 230V Applicable 125%Braking Torque 10%ED Max. Brake Torque Motor Braking Brake Resistor value Total Min. Max. Total Peak Braking Resistor series HP kW…
• Page 71
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series 460V Applicable 125%Braking Torque 10%ED Max. Brake Torque Motor Braking Resistor Total Min. Max. Total Peak Torque Brake Braking Resistor series for value spec. HP kW Braking Resistor Braking Power (kg-m) Unit each Brake Unit…
• Page 72
  If damage to the drive or other equipment is due to the fact that the brake resistors and brake modules in use are not provided by Delta, the warranty will be void. Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors. If the minimum resistance value is to be utilized, consult local dealers for the calculation of Watt figures.
• Page 73
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series Non-fuse Circuit Breaker Comply with UL standard: Per UL 508, paragraph 45.8.4, part a, The rated current of the breaker shall be 2~4 times of the maximum rated input current of AC motor drive. 3-phase 230V…
• Page 74
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series Fuse Specification Chart Use only the fuses comply with UL certificated. Use only the fuses comply with local regulations. Input Currnet I(A) Line Fuse 230V Model Heavy Duty Normal Duty I (A) Bussmann P/N…
• Page 75
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series AC Reactor When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer (600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents may occur in the power input circuit due to the load changes and the converter section may be damaged. To avoid this, it is recommend to use a serial connected AC input reactor(6%) at the AC Motor Drive mains input side to reduce the current and improve the input power efficiency.
• Page 76
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series Applications for AC Reactor Connected in input circuit Application 1 When more than one AC motor drive is connected to the same mains power, and one of them is ON during operation. Problem: When applying power to one of the AC motor drive, the charge current of the capacitors may cause voltage dip.
• Page 77
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series Zero Phase Reactors RF220X00A UNIT: mm (inch) Diagram A Recommended Cable Wind each wire around the core for 4 times. The reactor Wire Size (mm Wiring type Qty. must be placed at the AC motor drive output side as…
• Page 78
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series DC Reactor 230V DC Choke Inductance（mh） Input Voltage DC Amps 0.75 3.43 1.83 1.37 230Vac 0.78 50/60Hz 0.61 3-Phase 0.42 0.31 18.5 0.26 0.22 460V DC Choke Input Voltage DC Amps Inductance（mh） 0.75 9.77 7.12…
• Page 79
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series EMI Filter Applicable Model Reference Website EMI Filter VFD007C23A; http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/products/industrial_emc_filters/three_phase_industrial_ VFD015C23A; KMF325A mains_filters_high_performance/ VFD022C23A; VFD037C23A; KMF325A Three Phase Industrial Mains Filters — High Performance 25 Amps http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/products/industrial_emc_filters/three_phase_industrial_ VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; KMF370A mains_filters_high_performance/ VFD110C23A; KMF370A Three Phase Industrial Mains Filters — High Performance 70 Amps http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/products/industrial_emc_filters/three_phase_industrial_…
• Page 80
  All electrical equipment, including AC motor drives, will generate high-frequency/low-frequency noise and will interfere with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction when in operation. By using an EMI filter with correct installation, much interference can be eliminated. It is recommended to use DELTA EMI filter to have the best interference elimination performance.
• Page 81
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series Saddle on both ends Saddle on one end Figure 2 The length of motor cable When motor is driven by an AC motor drive of PWM type, the motor terminals will experience surge voltages easily due to components conversion of AC motor drive and cable capacitance.
• Page 82
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series Digital Keypad KPC-CE01 : LED Disp lay D ispla y freq uen cy, cu rre nt, vo ltag e and erro r etc. : Status Indicator F: Fre que ncy C omma nd H: Outp ut Frequ ency…
• Page 83
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series Dimension RJ45 Extension Lead for Digital Keypad Part # Description CBC-K3FT 3 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 0.9m) CBC-K5FT 5 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 1.5 m) CBC-K7FT 7 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 2.1 m)
• Page 84
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series Panel Mounting (MKC-KPPK) For MKC-KPPK model, user can choose wall mounting or embedded mounting, protection level is IP56. Applicable to the digital keypads (KPC-CC01 & KPC-CE01). Wall Mounting Embedded Mounting accessories*1 accessories*2 Screw *4 ~M4*p 0.7 *L8mm Screw *4 ~M4*p 0.7 *L8mm…
• Page 85
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series 7-17…
• Page 86
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series Conduit Box Kit Appearance Frame D Frame E Applicable models Applicable models VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E;VFD370C43A/43E; VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E; VFD750C23A/23E; VFD450C43A/43E; VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E Model number『MKC-DN1CB』 Model number『MKC-EN1CB』 ITEM Description Qty. ITEM Description Qty. 1 Screw M5*0.8*10L 1 Screw M5*0.8*10L…
• Page 87
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series Conduit Box Installation Frame D Loosen the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 10~12kg-cm (8.66~10.39Ib-in) Remove the 5 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
• Page 88
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series Frame E 1. Loosen the 4 cover screws and lift the cover; Screw torque: 12~ 15 kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in). 2. Fasten the 6 screws shown in the following figure and place the cover back to the original position. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
• Page 89
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series Frame F Loosen the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 14~16kg-cm (12.2~13.9Ib-in). Install the conduit box by fastens the 4 screws, as shown in the following figure.
• Page 90
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series Frame G On the conduit box, loosen 7 of the cover screws and remove the cover. On the drive, loosen 4 of the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the following figure.
• Page 91
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series Fasten all the screws. Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (20.8~30Ib-in). Place the cover back to the top and fasten the screws (as shown in the figure). Screw torque: 12~15kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in). 7-23…
• Page 92
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series Fan Kit Frames of the fan kit Frame A Model『MKC-AFKM』 Applicable Model VFD015C23A; VFD022C23A; VFD037C23A;VFD022C43A/43E; VFD037C43A/43E;VFD040C43A/43E; VFD055C43A/43E Frame B Model『MKC-BFKM1』 Applicable Model VFD055C23A; VFD075C43A/43E Frame B Model 『MKC-BFKM2』 Applicable Model VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/43E; VFD150C43A/43E Frame B Model 『MKC-BFKB』…
• Page 93
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series Frame C Model 『MKC-CFKB2』 Applicable Model VFD185C43A/43E; VFD220C43A/43E;VFD300C43A/43E Frame D Model 『MKC-DFKM』 Model 『MKC-DFKB』 Applicable Model VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E; VFD370C43A/43E; VFD450C43A/43E; VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E Frame E Model 『MKC-EFKM1』 Applicable Model VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E Frame E Model『MKC-EFKM2』 Applicable Model VFD750C23A/23E;…
• Page 94
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series Frame F Model 『MKC-FFKM』 Applicable Model VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E; VFD1600C43A/43E Frame F Model 『MKC-FFKB』 Applicable Model VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E; VFD1600C43A/43E Frame G Model 『MKC-GFKM』 Applicable Model VFD1850C43A/43E; VFD2200C43A/43E Frame H Model 『MKC-HFKM』 Applicable Model VFD2800C43A/43E; VFD3150C43A/43E; VFD3550C43A/43E;…
• Page 95
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series Fan Removal Frame A Applicable model VFD015C23A; VFD022C23A; VFD022C43A/43E; VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/43E; VFD040C43A/43E; VFD055C43A/43E Press the tabs on both side of the fan to successfully Disconnect the power terminal before removing the fan. remove the fan. (The arrow) (As shown below.)
• Page 96
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series (Figure 1) Loosen screw 1 and screw 2, press the on the (Figure 2) Loosen screw 3 and screw 4, press the tab on right and the left to remove the cover, follow the direction the right and the left to remove the cover.
• Page 97
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series Loosen screw 1 and screw 2 (as shown in the figure below), and disconnect fan power before removing the fan. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~25.6in-lbf). Frame F Applicable model VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E; VFD1600C43A/43E; Fan model『MKC-FFKM』 Loosen the screws and removes the fan (as shown in figure below). Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in』…
• Page 98
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series (3) Loosen the screws and remove the fan. (As shown in the figure below) Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in). Frame G Applicable model VFD1800C43A/43E; VFD2200C43A/43E; (2) For 1~8 shown in the figure: Loosen the screws Fan model『MKC-GFKM』…
• Page 99
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series Frame H Applicable model VFD2800C43A/43E; VFD3150C43A/43E; VFD3550C43A/43E (2) Loosen the screw and remove the top cover. Fan model 『MKC-HFKM』 Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in). (1) Loosen the screw and remove the top cover. Screw torque: 14~16kg-cm (12.2~13.9Ib-in) (3) Disconnect the fan.
• Page 100
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series Flange Mounting Kit Applicable Models, Frame A~F Frame A 『MKC-AFM1』 Applicable model VFD015C23A; VFD022C23A; VFD022C43A/43E Screw 1 *4 M3*P 0.5; L=6mm Screw 2*8 M6*P 1.0; L=16mm Accessories 1*1 Accessories 2*2 Accessories 3*2 『MKC-AFM』 Applicable model VFD007C23A;…
• Page 101
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series 『MKC-AFM1』Installation Install accessory 1 by fastening 4 of the screw 1(M3). Screw torque: 6~8kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in). Install accessory 2&3 by fastening 2 of the screw 2(M6). Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in). Install accessory 2&3 by fastening 2 of the screw 2(M6). Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in).
• Page 102
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 2 of the screw 1(M3). Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in). (As shown in following figure) Plate installation, place 4 of the screw 2 (M6) through accessory 1&2 and the plate then fasten the screws.
• Page 103
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series Frame B 『MKC-BFM』 Applicable model VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A; VFD075C43A/43E; VFD110C43A/43E; VFD150C43A/43E Screw 1 *4 ~ M8*P 1.25; Screw 2*6 ~ M6*P 1.0; Accessories 1*2 Accessories 2*2 Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] 7-35…
• Page 104
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series 『MKC-BFM』Installation Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 4 of the screw 1(M8). Screw torque: 40~45kg-cm (34.7~39.0Ib-in). (As shown in the following figure) Plate installation, place 6 of the screw 2 (M6) through accessory 1&2 and the plate then fasten the screws.
• Page 105
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series Frame C 『MKC-CFM』 Applicable model VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD220C23A; VFD185C43A/43E; VFD220C43A/43E; VFD300C43A/43E Screw 1*4 ~ M8*P 1.25; Screw 2*8 ~ M6*P 1.0; Accessories 1*2 Accessories 2*2 Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] 7-37…
• Page 106
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series 『MKC-CFM』Installation Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 4 of the screw 1(M8). Screw torque: 50~55kg-cm (43.4~47.7Ib-in). (As shown in the following figure) Plate installation, place 8 of the screw 2 (M6) through accessories 1&2 and the plate then fasten the screws.
• Page 107
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series Frame D Applicable model VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E; VFD370C43A/43E; VFD450C43A/43E; VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] M10*P1.5(4X) 11.0[0.43](4X) 7-39…
• Page 108
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series Frame D&E 1. Loosen 8 screws and remove Fixture 2 (as shown in 2. Loosen 10 screws and remove Fixture 1 (as shown the following figure). in the following figure). 3. Fasten 4 screws (as shown in the following figure).
• Page 109
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series Frame E Applicable model VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E; VFD750C23A/23E; VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] 7-41…
• Page 110
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series Frame F Applicable model VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E; VFD1600C43A/43E Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] 7-42…
• Page 111
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series Frame F 1. Loosen 12 screws and remove Fixture 2. 2. Loosen 12 screws and remove Fixture 2. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in). FIXTURE 2 FIXTURE2 3. Loosen screw 13 ~26 and remove Fixture 1. Install Fixture 1 by fasten screw 13 ~26 Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
• Page 112
  RJ-45 in RS-485 connector for users to wire conveniently. And its tiny dimension, handy use of plug-and-play and hot-swap provide more conveniences for connecting all DELTA IABU products to your PC. Applicable Models: All DELTA IABU products.
• Page 113
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series RJ-45 Description Description Reserved Reserved Reserved 3. Preparations before Driver Installation Please extract the driver file (IFD6530_Drivers.exe) by following steps. You could find driver file (IFD6530_Drivers.exe) in the CD supplied with IFD6530. Note: DO NOT connect IFD6530 to PC before extracting the driver file.
• Page 114
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series 4. Driver Installation After connecting IFD6530 to PC, please install driver by following steps. 7-46…
• Page 115
  Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series 5. LED Display 1. Steady Green LED ON: power is ON. 2. Blinking orange LED: data is transmitting. 7-47…

• Page 116: Chapter 8 Option Cards

  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series Chapter 8 Option Cards Please select applicable option cards for your drive or contact local distributor for suggestion. To prevent drive damage during installation, please removes the digital keypad and the cover before wiring. Refer to the following instruction.

• Page 117
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series Frame F Screw Torque: 12~ 15 Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.] Frame G Screw Torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.] Frame H Screw Torque: 14~16Kg-cm [12.15~13.89lb-in.]…
• Page 118
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series RJ45 (Socket) for digital keypad KPC-CC01; KPC-CE01 Please refer to CH10 Digital Keypad for more details on KPC-CE01. Please refer to CH10 Digital Keypad for more details on optional accessory RJ45 extension cable. Slot 3 2 Communication extension card (Slot 1) CMC-MOD01;…
• Page 119
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series EMC-D42A Terminals Descriptions Common for Multi-function input terminals Select SINK （NPN） /SOURCE （PNP） in J1 jumper / external power supply Refer to parameters 02-26~02-29 to program the multi-function inputs MI10~MI13. Internal power is applied from terminal E24: +24Vdc±5% 200mA, MI10~ MI13 External power +24VDC: max.
• Page 120
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series EMC-BPS01 Terminals Descriptions Input power: 24V±5% Maximum input current:0.5A External Power Note: Supply 1) Do not connect control terminal +24V (Digital control signal common: SOURCE) directly to the EMC-BPS01input terminal 24V. 2) Do not connect control terminal GND directly to the EMC-BPS01 input…
• Page 121
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series EMC-PG01L Terminal description Set by Pr.10-00~10-02 Terminals Descriptions Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V±5% (use FSW3 to switch +5V/+12V) Max. output current: 200mA Common for power and signal Encoder input signal (Line Driver) A1, /A1, B1, /B1, Z1, /Z1 It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
• Page 122
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series Wiring Diagram Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above). Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm (AWG24 to AWG18).
• Page 123
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series EMC-PG01O Terminal descriptions Set by Pr.10-00~10-02 Terminals Descriptions Output voltage for power +5V/+12V±5% (use FSW3 to switch +5V/+12V) Max. output current: 200mA Common for power and signal Encoder Input signal (Line Driver or Open Collector)
• Page 124
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series PG2 Wiring Diagram Ext Power (5-24V) Ext Pull high RES 4.7kΩ Ext Ground Wiring Diagram Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above).
• Page 125
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series EMC-PG01U FJMP1 S: Standard UVW Output Encoder; D: Delta Encoder Set by Pr.10-00~10-02 Terminals Descriptions Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V±5% (use FSW3 to switch +5V/+12V) Max. output current: 200mA Common for power and signal…
• Page 126
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series Wiring Diagram Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above). Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm (AWG24 to AWG18).
• Page 127
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series EMC-PG01R Terminal Descriptions Set by Pr.10-00~10-02 Terminals Descriptions Resolver Output Power R1- R2 7Vrms, 10kHz Resolver Input Signal S1,S2, S3, S4, 3.5±0.175Vrms, 10kHz Pulse Input signal (Line Driver or Open Collector) A2, /A2, Open Collector Input Voltage: +5~+24V (Note1) B2, /B2 It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
• Page 128
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series Wiring Diagram Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any high voltage AC power line (200 V and above). Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm (AWG24 to AWG18).
• Page 129
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series CMC-MOD01 Features Supports Modbus TCP protocol MDI/MDI-X auto-detect Baud rate: 10/100Mbps auto-detect E-mail alarm AC motor drive keypad/Ethernet configuration Virtual serial port. Product File I/O CARD & Relay Card PG Card Comm. Card RJ-45 connection port…
• Page 130
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series Environment ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2) EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4) Noise immunity Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-5) Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-6) Operation: -10°C ~ 50°C (temperature), 90% (humidity) Operation/storage Storage: -25°C ~ 70°C (temperature), 95% (humidity)
• Page 131
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series Decoding method for Decoding method for Delta AC motor P09-30 communication drive IP setting Static IP(0) / Dynamic distribution IP(1) P09-75 P09-76 IP address -1 IP address 192.168.1.5 IP address -2 IP address 192.168.1.5…
• Page 132
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series LED Indicator & Troubleshooting LED Indicators Status Indication How to correct it? Power supply in normal status POWER Green No power supply Check the power supply Network connection in normal status Flashes Network in operation…
• Page 133
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series CMC-PD01 Features Supports PZD control data exchange. Supports PKW polling AC motor drive parameters. Supports user diagnosis function. Auto-detects baud rates; supports Max. 12Mbps. Product Profile 1. NET indicator 2. POWER indicator 3. Positioning hole 4.
• Page 134
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series Environment ESD(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-2) EFT(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-4) Noise immunity Surge Teat(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-5) Conducted Susceptibility Test(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-6) Operation: -10ºC ~ 50ºC (temperature), 90% (humidity) Operation /storage Storage: -25ºC ~ 70ºC (temperature), 95% (humidity) Shock / vibration International standards: IEC61131-2, IEC68-2-6 (TEST Fc)/IEC61131-2 &…
• Page 135
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series CMC-DN01 Functions Based on the high-speed communication interface of Delta HSSP protocol, able to conduct immediate control to AC motor drive. Supports Group 2 only connection and polling I/O data exchange. For I/O mapping, supports Max. 32 words of input and 32 words of output.
• Page 136
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series Electrical Specification Power supply voltage 5VDC (supplied by AC motor drive) Insulation voltage 500VDC Communication wire 0.85W power consumption Power consumption Weight Environment ESD (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-2) EFT (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-4) Noise immunity Surge Teat(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-5) Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-6) Operation: -10ºC ~ 50ºC (temperature), 90% (humidity)
• Page 137
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series NS LED LED status Indication How to correct it? 1. Check the power of CMC-DN01 and see if the connection is normal. 2. Make sure at least one or more nodes are on the No power supply or CMC-DN01 has not completed MAC ID test yet.
• Page 138
  1 Port Transmission method IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u Transmission cable Category 5e shielding 100M Transmission speed 10/100 Mbps Auto-Detect ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, MODBUS OVER TCP/IP, EtherNet/IP, Delta Network protocol Configuration Electrical Specification Weight Insulation voltage 500VDC Power consumption 0.8W…
• Page 139
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series Environment ESD (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-2) EFT (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-4) Noise immunity Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-5) Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-6) Operation: -10°C ~ 50°C (temperature), 90% (humidity) Operation/storage Storage: -25°C ~ 70°C (temperature), 95% (humidity)
• Page 140
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1 [Figure 3] [Figure 4] [Figure 5] Communication Parameters for VFD-C2000 Connected to Ethernet When VFD-C2000 is connected to Ethernet network, please set up the communication parameters for it according to the table below. The Ethernet master is only able to read/write the frequency word and control word of VFD-C2000 after the communication parameters are set.
• Page 141
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series Disconnecting CMC- EIP01 from VFD-C2000 1. Switch off the power supply of VFD-C2000. 2. Remove the two screws (see Figure 6). 3. Twist opens the card clip and inserts the slot type screwdriver to the hollow to prize the PCB off the card clip (see Figure 7).
• Page 142
  Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series Abnormality Cause How to correct it? Poor contact to RJ-45 Make sure RJ-45 connector is connected to connector Ethernet port. CMC-EIP01 not connected to Make sure CMC-EIP01 is connected to network. network No communication…

• Page 143: Chapter 15 Canopen Overview

  500 ± 10 19 ± 0.4 39 ± 0.4 TAP-CB04 1000± 10 CANopen Dimension Model: TAP-CN03 NOTE For more information on CANopen, please refer to Chapter 15 CANopen Overview or CANopen user manual can also be downloaded on Delta website: http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/ 8-28…

• Page 144: Chapter 9 Specification

  Chapter 9 Specifications |C2000 Series Chapter 9 Specification 230V Series Frame Size Model VFD-_ _ _C_ _ Power of corresponding heavy duty 0.75 18.5 motor (kW) Power of corrsponding normal duty 0.75 18.5 motor (kW) Rated Output Capacity (kVA) Rated Output Current…

• Page 145
  Chapter 9 Specifications |C2000 Series DC reactor Frame A to C (optional); Frame D and above (built-in) EMI Filter Frame A to C (optional); Frame D and above (optional) EMC-COP01 VFDXXC23A (optional); VFDXXXC23E (built-in)
• Page 146
  Chapter 9 Specifications |C2000 Series 460V Series Frame Size Model VFD-_ _ _C_ _ Power of corresponding heavy 0.75 18.5 duty motor (kW) Power of corrsponding normal 0.75 18.5 duty motor (kW) Rated Output Capacity (kVA) Rated Output Current (A)
• Page 147
  Chapter 9 Specifications |C2000 Series VFDXXXC43A: No EMI Filter; EMI Filter VFDXXXC43E: Built-in EMI Filter VFDXXXC43A/43E Frame D and above: EMI Filter is optional EMC-COP01 VFDXXC43A (optional); VFDXXXC43E (built-in) NOTE For FRAME A, B and C, Model VFDXXXC43A the enclosure type is IP20/NEMA1/UL TYPE1.
• Page 148
  Chapter 9 Specifications |C2000 Series Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation DO NOT expose the AC motor drive in the bad environment, such as dust, direct sunlight, corrosive/inflammable gasses, humidity, liquid and vibration environment. The salt in the air must be less than 0.01mg/cm every year.
• Page 149
  Chapter 9 Specifications |C2000 Series Specification for Operation Temperature and Protection Level Operation Model Frame Top cover Conduit Box Protection Level Temperature Frame A~C Top cover -10~50℃ IP20/UL Open Type 230V: Removed Standard 0.75~22kW Standard conduit plate 460V: -10~40℃ with top IP20/UL Type1/NEMA1 0.75~30kW…

• Page 150: Chapter 10 Digital Keypad

  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad |C2000 Chapter 10 Digital Keypad 10-1 Descriptions of Digital Keypad 10-2 Function of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 10-3 TPEditor Installation Instruction 10-4 Fault Code Description of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 10-1 Descriptions of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 KPC-CE01(Option) Communication Interface RJ-45 (socket)、RS-485 interface;…

• Page 151
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad|C2000 Series Press menu to return to main menu. Menu content: KPC-CE01 does not support function 5 ~13. 1. Detail Parameter 7. Quick/Simple Setup 13. PC Link 2. Copy Parameter 8. Display Setup 3. Keypad Locked 9. Time Setup 4.
• Page 152
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad |C2000 RUN LED: Condition/State status CANopen at initial No LED Blinking CANopen at pre-operation CANopen ~”RUN” Single CANopen at stopped flash CANopen at operation status No LED ERR LED: Condition/ State status No Error Single One message fail flash Double Guarding fail or heartbeat fail…
• Page 153
  Startup page can only display pictures, no flash. When Power ON, it will display startup page then the main page. The main page displays Delta’s default setting F/H/A/U, the display order can be set by Pr.00.03 (Startup display). When the selected item is U page, use left key and right key to switch between the items, the display order of U page is set by Pr.00.04 (User display).
• Page 154
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad |C2000 Display Icon Star t-up : prese nt se tting 1.Default 1 : roll down the page for more options 2.Default 2 3.User define Press for more options. Pr setup : show complete se ntence 00:System Pr Press for complete information 01:Basic…
• Page 155
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad|C2000 Series Copy Parameter Copy parameters (Pr) Copy pr 4 sets of parameters duplication. When the setting is complete, the date will be written to the copy parameters (Pr) page. Copy pr 1.2009/05/04 Press ENTER File 1 1.SAVE…
• Page 156
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad |C2000 Copy PLC Copy PLC Copy PLC Duplicate 4 sets of parameters. When the setting is complete, the date will be written to the Copy PLC page. Copy PLC 1.2010/03/14 Press to setting me nu. ENTER File 1 Press to sele ct where to save the file…
• Page 157
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad|C2000 Series Quick/Simple Setting Quick Setting: Quick setting 1. V/F Mode 1: V/F mode 01: Password Input (Decode) 2: VFPG mode 00-07 V/F mode P00-07 3: SVC mode 01. Password Input 02. Password Setting Password Input 03. Control Mode Press to select.
• Page 158
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad |C2000 8. Stop Method (P00-22) 9. Digital Keypad STOP function (P00-32) 10. Max. Operation Frequency (P01-00) 11. Base Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-01) 12. Max. Output Voltage Setting of Motor 1 (P01-02) 13. Min. Output Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-07) 14.
• Page 159
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad|C2000 Series 29. Emergency Stop (EF) & Force to Stop Selection (P07-20) 30. Filter Time of Torque Command (P07-24) 31. Filter Time of Slip Compensation (P07-25) 32. Slip Compensation Gain (P07-27) FOCPG Mode 01: Password Input (Decode)
• Page 160
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad |C2000 6. Source of the Operation Command (P00-21) 7. Max. Operation Frequency (P01-00) 8. Base Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-01) 9. Max. Output Voltage Setting of Motor 1 (P01-02) 10. Full-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (P05-01) 11.
• Page 161
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad|C2000 Series Display setup 1. Contrast Adjustment Disp setup Contrast adjust 1.Contrast Ad Adjust setting value 2.BKLT time 2. Back-lighted Time BKLT Time Press ENTER Adjust setting value enter the setting menu. Time setting Enter time setup page, «9» will continue to blink…
• Page 162
  Please refer to Chapter 07 Optional Acessories for more detail. TPEditor TPEditor Installation Instruction is on page 10-15 and TPEditor V1.30.6 is available for download at: http://www.delta.com.tw/ch/product/em/download/download_main.asp?act =3&pid=1&cid=1&tpid=3 13. PC Link The function of PC Link is to establish a connection with computer to download the page for user defined editing.
• Page 163
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad|C2000 Series Other display When fault occur, the menu will display: Fault Warning CE01 Comm. Error 1 Oc at accel 1. Press ENTER and start RESET. If still no response, please contact local distributor or return to the factory. To view the fault DC BUS voltage, output current and output voltage, press “MENU”…
• Page 164
  2. Go to File(F) Click on New. The Window below will pop up. At the device type, click on the drop down menu and choose DELTA VFD-C Inverter. At the TP type, click on the drop down menu and choose VFD-C KeyPad.
• Page 165
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad|C2000 Series 2. Static Text . Open a blank page, click once on this button , and then double click on that blank page. The following windows will pop up. On the right hand side of the Static Text Setting, you can adjust the frame setting, the text direction, the alignment and the font setting.
• Page 166
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad |C2000 icon that you need. Then drag that icon and enlarge it to the size that you need on that blank page. For example, if you drag this icon to a blank page, you will see the following window. 5.
• Page 167
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad|C2000 Series Edit Main Page Click on a page under the TP Page to edit or go to View click on Boot Page to begin to edit main page. The objects available for you to use are in the red circles below.
• Page 168
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad |C2000 Value Length: Click on the drop down to choose 16bits or 32 bits. Then click OK to accept the setting or click Cancel to abort. Main Scale & Sub Scale: In order to divide the whole scale into equal parts, key in the numbers of your choices for main scale and sub scale.
• Page 169
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad|C2000 Series d. There are no supported functions other than the setting mentioned above. Clock Display Setting : Click once on this button Open a new file and click once in that window, you will see the following In the clock display setting, you can choose to display Time, Day or Date on the Keypad.
• Page 170
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad |C2000 Related Device: There are two blank spaces to fill in, one is <Write> and another one is <Read>. Input the numbers that you want to display and the corresponding numbers of a parameter and that of a communication port.
• Page 171
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad|C2000 Series 10-4 Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 Fault Codes and Descriptions Following fault codes and description are for digital keypad KPC-CC01 with version V1.01 and version higher. LCM Display Description Fault Keypad flash memory read error FrEr kpdFlash Read Er…
• Page 172
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad |C2000 Fault Descriptoin of File Copy and Setting Errors LCM Display Description File 1 Parameter and rile are read only Read Only File 1 Fail to write parameter and file Write Fail File 1 AC drive is in operating status VFD Running File 1 AC drive parameter is locked…
• Page 173
  Chapter 10 Digital Keypad|C2000 Series LCM Display Description File 1 Other AC drive error VFD Issue 10-24…
• Page 174
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings This chapter provides summary of parameter settings for user to gather the parameter setting ranges, factory settings and set parameters. The parameters can be set, changed and reset by the digital keypad.
• Page 175
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 0: No function 1: Read only 5: Reset KWH display to 0 6: Reset PLC (including CANopen Master Index) 7: Reset CANopen Index (Slave) 00-02 Parameter Reset 8: keypad lock…
• Page 176
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting (Hz) (J.) 37: Reserved 38: Display drive status (6.) 39: Display estimated output torque, postitive and negative, using Nt-m as unit (t 0.0: postitive torque; -0.0: negative torque (C.)
• Page 177
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 3: External UP/DOWN terminal 4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-16 without direction) 5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr.10-16) 6: CANopen communication card 7: Reserved 8: Communication card (no CANopen card) 0: Digital keypad 1: External terminals.
• Page 178
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 0: Digital keypad 1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled. 2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP Source of the Operation Command 00-31 disabled. （HAND） 3: CANopen communication card 4: Reserved…
• Page 179
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 01 Basic Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 60.00/ 01-00 Max. Operation Frequency 50.00~600.00Hz 50.00 60.00/ 01-01 Output Frequency of Motor 1 0.00~600.00Hz 50.00 230V: 0.0V~255.0V 200.0 01-02 Output Voltage of Motor 1 400.0 460V: 0.0V~510.0V…
• Page 180
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second AC drive with power greater than 30HP: 60.00/60.0 01-22 JOG Frequency 6.00 0.00~600.00Hz 01-23 1st/4th Accel/decel Frequency 0.00 0.00~600.00Hz 0.20 Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second 01-24 S-curve Acceleration Begin Time 1 Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second…
• Page 181
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 02 Digital Input/Output Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 0: 2-wire mode, power on for operation control 02-00 2-wire/3-wire Operation Control 1: 2-wire mode 2, power on for operation control 2: 3-wire, power on for operation control…
• Page 182
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 39: Torque command direction 40: Force coast to stop 41: HAND switch 42: AUTO switch 43: Enable resolution selection (Pr.02-48) 44: Reversed direction homing 45: Forward direction homing 46: Homing (ORG)
• Page 183
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 18: Preliminary count value attained, returns to 0 (Pr.02-19) 19: Base Block 20: Warning output 21: Over voltage warning 22: Over-current stall prevention warning 23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning…
• Page 184
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting Activate 1: Drive runs if run command exists after reset 02-47 Zero-speed Level of Motor 0~65535 rpm Max. Frequency of Resolution 02-48 60.00 0.01~600.00Hz Switch Switch the delay time of Max.
• Page 185
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 03 Analog Input/Output Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 03-00 Analog Input Selection (AVI) 0: No function 1: Frequency command (torque limit under torque 03-01 Analog Input Selection (ACI) control mode) 03-02 Analog Input Selection (AUI)
• Page 186
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 03-20 Multi-function Output 1 (AFM1) 0: Output frequency (Hz) 03-23 Multi-function Output 2 (AFM2) 1: Frequency command (Hz) 2: Motor speed (Hz) 3: Output current (rms) 4: Output voltage…
• Page 187
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 3: 3 point curve of AVI & ACI 4: 3 point curve of AUI 5: 3 point curve of AVI & AUI 6: 3 point curve of ACI & AUI 7: 3 point curve of AVI &…
• Page 188
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 04 Multi-step Speed Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 04-00 1st Step Speed Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 04-01 2nd Step Speed Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 04-02 3rd Step Speed Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 04-03 4th Step Speed Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 04-04 5th Step Speed Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz…
• Page 189
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting Position command 12 -30000~30000 04-37 (revolution) -32767~32767 04-38 Position command 12 (pulse) Position command 13 -30000~30000 04-39 (revolution) -32767~32767 04-40 Position command 13 (pulse) Position command 14 -30000~30000 04-41…
• Page 190
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 05 Motor Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 0: No function 1: Rolling test for induction motor(IM) (Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current) 2: Static test for induction motor(IM) 3: No function 05-00 Motor Auto Tuning…
• Page 191
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting Delay Time for 05-25 Y-connection/△-connection 0.200 0.000~60.000 sec. Switch of Induction Motor Accumulative Watt-second of 05-26 Read only Motor in Low Word (W-sec) Accumulative Watt-second of 05-27 Read only…
• Page 192
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 06 Protection Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 230V: 180.0 Frame A to D: 150.0~220.0Vdc 200.0 Frame E and frames above E: 190.0~220.0V 06-00 Low Voltage Level 460V: Frame A to D: 300.0~440.0Vdc 360.0 Frame E and frames above E: 380.0~440.0V…
• Page 193
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 06-16 Stall Prevention Limit Level 0～100% (Pr.06-03, Pr.06-04) 06-17 Present Fault Record 0: No fault record Second Most Recent Fault 06-18 1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA) Record 06-19 Third Most Recent Fault Record…
• Page 194
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 53: Reserved 54: Communication error (CE1) 55: Communication error (CE2) 56: Communication error (CE3) 57: Communication error (CE4) 58: Communication Time-out (CE10) 59: PU Time-out (CP10) 60: Brake transistor error (bF) 61: Y-connection/△-connection switch error (ydc)
• Page 195
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting Read 06-36 IGBT Temperature at Malfunction 0.0~6553.5 ℃ only Capacitance Temperature at Read 06-37 0.0~6553.5 ℃ Malfunction only Motor Speed in rpm at Read 06-38 0~65535 Malfunction only Read…
• Page 196
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting Read 06-64 Fault Record 2 (Min) 0~64799 min only Read 06-65 Fault Record 3 (Min) 0~64799 min only Read 06-66 Fault Record 4 (Min) 0~64799 min only Read 06-67…
• Page 197
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 07 Special Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 380.0 230V: 350.0~450.0Vdc 07-00 Software Brake Level 760.0 460V: 700.0~900.0Vdc 07-01 DC Brake Current Level 0~100% 07-02 DC Brake Time at Start-up 0.0~60.0 sec. 07-03 DC Brake Time at Stop 0.0~60.0 sec.
• Page 198
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 0: Disable 07-21 Auto Energy-saving Operation 1: Enable 07-22 Energy-saving Gain 10～1000% 0: Enable AVR Auto Voltage Regulation(AVR) 07-23 1: Disable AVR Function 2: Disable AVR during deceleration Filter Time of Torque Command 07-24 0.020…
• Page 199
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 08 High-function PID Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 0: No function 1: Negative PID feedback: input from external terminal AVI (Pr.03-00) 2: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip direction) 3: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
• Page 200
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 09 Communication Parameters Factory Explanation Settings Setting 09-00 COM1 Communication Address 1~254 09-01 COM1 Transmission Speed 4.8～115.2Kbps 0: Warn and continue operation COM1 Transmission Fault 1: Warn and ramp to stop 09-02 Treatment…
• Page 201
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 09-27 Reserved 09-29 Communication Decoding 0: Decoding Method 1 09-30 Method 1: Decoding Methond 2 0: Modbus 485 -1: Internal Communication Slave 1 -2: Internal Communication Slave 2 -3: Internal Communication Slave 3…
• Page 202
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 09-44 Reserved 0: Disable 09-45 CANopen Master Function 1: Enable 09-46 CANopen Master Address 1~127 09-47 Reserved 09-59 0: No communication card 1: DeviceNet Slave 2: Profibus-DP Slave Identifications for…
• Page 203
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting Address Mask 1 of the 09-80 0~255 Communication Card Address Mask 2 of the 09-81 0~255 Communication Card Address Mask 3 of the 09-82 0~255 Communication Card Address Mask 4 of the…
• Page 204
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters IM: Induction Motor; PM: Permanent Magnet Motor NOTE Factory Explanation Settings Setting 0: Disable 1: ABZ 10-00 Encoder Type Selection 2: ABZ (Delta Encoder for PM motor) 3: Resolver 1x (Standard encoder for PM motor)
• Page 205
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting Range for Encoder Position 10-20 0~65535pulse Attained 10-21 Filter Time (PG2) 0~65.535 sec 0.100 0: Electronic Frequency 10-22 Speed Mode (PG2) 1: Mechanical Frequency (base on pole pair) 10-23…
• Page 206
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 11 Advanced Parameters IM: Induction Motor; PM: Permanent Magnet Motor NOTE Factory Explanation Settings Setting bit 0: Auto tuning for ASR and APR bit 1: Inertia estimate (only for FOCPG mode) bit 2: Zero servo…
• Page 207
  Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Explanation Settings Setting 11-29 Torque Offset Setting 0~100% 11-30 High Torque Offset 30.0 0~100% 11-31 Middle Torque Offset 20.0 0~100% 11-32 Low Torque Offset 10.0 0~100% 0: Digital keypad 1: RS-485 communication (Pr.11-34) 2: Analog input (Pr.03-00)
• Page 208
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings 00 Drive Parameters This parameter can be set during operation. Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive Factory Setting: #.# Settings Read Only Display AC Motor Drive Rated Current Factory Setting: #.#…
• Page 209
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Parameter Reset Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: No Function 1: Write protection for parameters Reset KWH display to 0 6: Reset PLC (including CANopen Master Index) 7: Reset CANopen Index (Slave) 8: keypad lock…
• Page 210
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 8: Display estimate output torque % (t = 00: positive torque; -00 negative torque) (t) 9: Display PG feedback (G) (refer to Note 1) 10: Display PID feedback in % (b) 11: Display AVI in % (1.), 0~10V/4-20mA/0-20mA corresponds to 0~100% (Refer to Note 2) 12: Display ACI in % (2.),…
• Page 211
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 39: Display estimated output torque, positive and negative, using Nt-m as unit (t 0.0: positive; -0.0 negative torque（C.） NOTE 1. When Pr.10-01 is set to 1000 and Pr.10-02 is set to 1/2, the display range for PG feedback will be from 0 to 4000.
• Page 212
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Software Version Factory Setting: #.# Settings Read only Parameter Protection Password Input Factory Setting: 0 Settings 1~9998, 10000~65535 Display 0~3 (the times of password attempts) This parameter allows user to enter their password (which is set in Pr.00-08) to unlock the parameter protection and to make changes to the parameter.
• Page 213
  0: Speed mode 1: Point-to-Point position control 2: Torque mode 3: Home mode This parameter determines the control mode of C2000 series AC motor drive. Control of Speed Mode Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: VF (IM V/f control) 1: VFPG (IM V/f control+ Encoder)
• Page 214
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 6: PM Sensorless (PM field oriented sensorless vector control) When setting Pr.00-11 to 0, the V/F control diagram is shown as follows. Fcmd Pr00-20 accel/decel time DC BUS Voltage DC BUS Voltage Protection…
• Page 215
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series When setting Pr.00-11 to 2, the sensorless vector control diagram is shown as follows. DC BUS DC BUS Voltage Voltage Protection Detection Current Fcmd Detection Pr00-20 IGBT table e->s 07-23 Top limit F:01-10…
• Page 216
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series When setting Pr.00-11 to 5, FOC sensorless control diagram is shown as follows. When setting Pr.00-11 to 6, PM FOC sensorless control diagram is shown as follows: 10 39 07-01 command ACRd dq2abc…
• Page 217
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Control of Torque Mode Factory Setting: 0 TQCPG（IM Torque control + Encoder） Settings 1: TQCPG (PM Torque control + Encoder) 2: TQC Sensorless (IM Sensorless torque control) TQCPG control diagram is shown in the following: no off set by P r.03- 00…
• Page 218
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series TQC Sensorless control diagram is shown in the following: Reserved Reserved Load Selection Factory Setting: 0 0: Normal load Settings 1: Heavy load Normal duty: over load, rated output current 160% in 3 second. Please refer to Pr.00-17 for the setting of carrier wave.
• Page 219
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 460V Series Models 1-20HP [0.75-15kW] 25-75HP [18.5-55kW] 100-475HP [75-355kW] Setting Range 02~15kHz 02~10kHz 02~09kHz Normal Duty Factory 8kHz 6kHz 4kHz Setting Heavy Duty Factory 2kHz Setting Electromagnetic Heat Current Carrier Acoustic Noise or Leakage…
• Page 220
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 6: CANopen communication card 7: Reserved 8: Communication card (no CANopen card) It is used to set the source of the master frequency in AUTO mode. Pr.00-20 and 00-21 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in AUTO mode.
• Page 221
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Ramp to stop: the AC motor drive decelerates from the setting of deceleration time to 0 or minimum output frequency (Pr. 01-09) and then stop (by Pr.01-07). Coast to stop: the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon a STOP command and the motor free runs until it comes to a complete standstill.
• Page 222
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 0.0~6553.5 (when Pr.00-25 set to 1 decimal place) 0.0~655.35 (when Pr.00-25 set to 2 decimal place) 0.0~65.535 (when Pr.00-25 set to 3 decimal place) User define is enabled when Pr.00-26 is not 0. The setting of Pr.00-26 corresponds to Pr.01.00 (Max.
• Page 223
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series disabled. When MI is set to 56 for LOC/REM selection, if Pr.00-29 is not set to 0, the external terminal has the highest priority of command and the ATUO/HAND keys will be disabled.
• Page 224
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Homing mode Factory Setting: 0000h Settings: Note: Forward run = closckwise (CW) Reverse run = counterclockwise (CCW) 0: Forward run to home. Set PL forward limit as check point. 1: Reverse run (CCW) to home. Set NL reverse limit (CCWL) as check point.
• Page 225
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 3. When Y=1, X=2 Speed Position Z p ulse ORGP 4. When Y=1, X=3 Speed Position Z p ulse ORGP 5. When Y=2, X=2 Speed Position ORGP 6. When Y=2, X=3 Speed Position ORGP 7.
• Page 226
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 8. When Y=2, X=5 Spe ed Position Z pulse Homing by Frequency 1 Factory Setting: 8.00 Settings 0.00~600.00Hz Homing by Frequency 2 Factory Setting: 2.00 Settings 0.00~600.00Hz Control by Multi-funcion Input Terminal Pr. 02-01~02-08 (44~47).
• Page 227
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Group 1 Basic Parameters This parameter can be set during operation. Maximum Output Frequency Factory Setting: 60.00/50.00 Settings 50.00~600.00Hz This parameter determines the AC motor drive’s Maximum Output Frequency. All the AC motor drive frequency command sources (analog inputs 0 to +10V, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 20mAand ±10V) are…
• Page 228
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 2 Factory Setting: 11.0/22.0 Settings 230V series: 0.0~240.0V 460V series: 0.0~480.0V Mid-point Frequency 2 of Motor 1 Factory Setting: 0.50 Settings 0.00~600.00Hz Mid-point Voltage 2 of Motor 1 Factory Setting: 2.0/4.0…
• Page 229
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Pr.01-35 to Pr.01-42 is the V/f curve for the motor 2. When multi-function input terminals Pr.02-01~02-08 and Pr.02-26 ~Pr.02-31 are set to 14 and enabled, the AC motor drive will act as the 2nd V/f curve.
• Page 230
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Start-Up Frequency Factory Setting: 0.50 Settings 0.0~600.00Hz When start frequency is higher than the min. output frequency, drives’ output will be from start frequency to the setting frequency. Please refer to the following diagram for details.
• Page 231
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Pr.01-10 setting must be ≥ Pr.01-11 setting. Pr.01-00 setting is regarded as 100.0%. × Output frequency upper limit = (Pr.01-00 Pr.01-10) /100 This setting will limit the max. Output frequency of drive. If frequency setting is higher than Pr.01-10, the output frequency will be limited by Pr.01-10 setting.
• Page 232
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Decel. Time 3 Accel. Time 4 Decel. Time 4 JOG Acceleration Time JOG Deceleration Time Factory Setting: 10.00/10.0 Factory Setting for AC drive with power greater than 30HP: 60.00/60.0 Settings Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 seconds Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.00 seconds…
• Page 233
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series JOG Frequency Factory Setting: 6.00 Settings 0.00~600.00Hz Both external terminal JOG and key “F1” on the keypad KPC-CC01 can be used. When the jog command is ON, the AC motor drive will accelerate from 0Hz to jog frequency (Pr.01-22). When the jog command is OFF, the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog Frequency to zero.
• Page 234
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Frequency 01-26 01-25 Time 01-24 01-27 Skip Frequency 1 (upper limit) Skip Frequency 1 (lower limit) Skip Frequency 2 (upper limit) Skip Frequency 2 (lower limit) Skip Frequency 3 (upper limit) Skip Frequency 3 (lower limit) Factory Setting: 0.00…
• Page 235
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series When the frequency is less than Fmin (Pr.01-07 or Pr.01-41), it will operate by this parameter. When it is set to 0, the AC motor drive will be in waiting mode without voltage output from terminals U/V/W.
• Page 236
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 01-02 Voltage % 1.5 power c urve 01-01 Square curve F requenc y% Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration Setting Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Linear accel./decel. 1: Auto accel., linear decel. 2: Linear accel., auto decel.
• Page 237
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series F requenc y 01-00 Max. Fr equency 01- 07 Min. T ime accel. time decel. time Fr equency 01-12 01-14 01-13 01-15 01-16 01-18 01-17 01-19 Acc el./Decel. Time When P r. 01-44 is set to 0.
• Page 238
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 02 Digital Input/Output Parameter This parameter can be set during operation. 2-wire/3-wire Operation Control Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: 2 wire mode 1 1: 2 wire mode 2 2: 3 wire mode It is used to set the operation control method: Pr.02-00…
• Page 239
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI13) Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI14) Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI15) Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: no function 1: multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position command 1…
• Page 240
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 52: Selection for PLC mode bit1 53: Trigger CANopen quick stop 54~55: Reserve 56: Local/Remote Selection 57~70: Reserve This parameter selects the functions for each multi-function terminal. The terminals of Pr.02-26~Pr.02-29 are virtual and set as MI10~MI13 when using with optional card EMC-D42A.
• Page 241
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions Fr eq ue ncy S etti ng A ccel . in hi bi t fr eq uency De cel . in hibit a re a a re a A ctua l o pe ra tio n fr eq uency A ccel.
• Page 242
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions increased/decreased by Pr.02-09/Pr.02-10. Digital Down command PID function disabled When the contact is ON, the PID function is disabled. When the contact is ON, it will clear current counter value and Clear counter display “0”.
• Page 243
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions Signal confirmation for When is the contact is ON, the drive will operate by 1st V/f. Y-connection Signal confirmation for When the contact is ON, the drive will operate by 2nd V/f.
• Page 244
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions When the contact is ON, the AC motor drive will execute internal single-point position control according to the setting in Pr.10-19. This function is valid in FOCPG mode only. Output…
• Page 245
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions When Pr.00-20 is set to 4 or 5 and this contact is ON, the input pulse of PG card is position command. When using this function, it is recommended to set Pr.11-25 to 0.
• Page 246
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions Mechanical gear ratio When this contact is ON, the mechanical gear ratio switch will be switch the second group A2/B2 (refer to Pr.10-08 and Pr.10-09). When drive=enable, RUN command is valid.
• Page 247
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series F requenc y F requenc y c ommand Ml1~15 T ime Ml1~15 DOWN External ter minal UP k ey VFD-C Pr.02-09 set to 1: it will increase/decrease frequency command (F) by the setting of acceleration/deceleration (Pr.01-12~01-19) and only be valid during operation.
• Page 248
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Multi-function Output 1 (Relay1) Factory Setting: 11 Multi-function Output 2 (Relay2) Factory Setting: 1 Multi-function Output 3 (MO1) Multi-function Output 4 (MO2) Output terminal of I/O extension card (MO10) Output terminal of I/O extension card (MO11)
• Page 249
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 22: Over-current stall prevention warning 23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning 24: Operation mode indication 25: Forward command 26: Reverse command 27: Output when current >= Pr.02-33 (>= 02-33) 28: Output when current <=Pr.02-33 (<= 02-33) 29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-34 (>= 02-34)
• Page 250
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions No Function Operation Indication Active when the drive is not at STOP. Master Frequency Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output frequency Attained setting. Desired Frequency Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-22) is attained.
• Page 251
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions  　-connection for the Active when PR.05-24 is higher than Pr.05-23 and time is more Motor Coil than Pr.05-25. Zero Speed (actual Active when the actual output frequency is 0. (the drive should be…
• Page 252
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Settings Functions Descriptions level except 0 and set Pr.07-02 = T2 (DC brake time at start up) and Pr.07-03 = T2 (DC brake current at stop). It is recommend to set T2 >T1 and try to activate brake control during zero-speed status.
• Page 253
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Example: Crane Application Output Frequency Freq. command<02 -58 Freq. Co mman d>02-34 or o utput current <02-57 & output cu rre nt >02 -33 multi-function ou tput MO=42 (Active when Fcom>=02 -34, outp ut current>02-33 and time…
• Page 254
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series When the display shows c5555, the drive has counted 5,555 times. If display shows c5555•, it means that real counter value is between 55,550 to 55,559. Preliminary Counting Value Attained (not return to 0)
• Page 255
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Fcmd=60Hz 42Hz 02-24=40Hz 40Hz 38Hz 02-25=2Hz 12Hz 02-22=10Hz 10Hz 02-23=2Hz 02-13,02-14, 02-36,02-37, 02-13,02-14, 02-36,02-37, =4 Brake Delay Time Factory Setting: 0.000 Settings 0.000~65.000 sec When the AC motor drive runs after Pr.02-32 delay time, the corresponding multi-function output terminal (12: mechanical brake release) will be ON.
• Page 256
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series If this parameter is used without DC brake, it will be invalid. Refer to the following operation timing. zero ze ro speed sp eed frequency co mma nd output frequency STOP RUN/STOP Multi-function output…
• Page 257
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Zero-speed Level of Motor Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0~65535 rpm This parameter should be used with the multi-function output terminals (set to 43). It needs to be used with PG cared and motor with encoder feedback.
• Page 258
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Display the Status of Multi-function Input Terminal Factory Setting: Read only Weights F WD R EV 0 =O n 1 =O ff MI1 0 MI11 MI1 2 F or MI1 3 opt ion…
• Page 259
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Display External Output terminal occupied by PLC Factory Setting: Read only P.02-52 shows the external multi-function input terminal that used by PLC. Weights B it 0=ON 1=OFF MI10 MI11 For option MI12 card…
• Page 260
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Display Analog Input Terminal occupied by PLC Factory Setting: Read only P.02-53 shows the external multi-function output terminal that used by PLC. 0=O N Weights 1=O FF 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2…
• Page 261
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Reserved Multi-function output terminal: Function 42: Brake Current Checking Point Factory setting: 0 Settings 0~150% Multi-function output terminal: Function 42: Brake Frequency Checking Point Factory setting：0.00 Settings 0.00~655.35Hz Pr02-32, Pr02-33, Pr02-34, Pr02-57 and Pr02-58 can be applied on setting up cranes. (Choose…
• Page 262
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 03 Analog Input/Output Parameter This parameter can be set during operation. Analog Input Selection (AVI) Factory Setting: 1 Analog Input Selection (ACI) Factory Setting: 0 Analog Input Selection (AUI) Factory Setting: 0 Settings…
• Page 263
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series It is used to set the corresponding AVI voltage of the external analog input 0. Analog Input Bias (ACI) Factory Setting: 0 Settings -100.0~100.0% It is used to set the corresponding ACI voltage of the external analog input 0.
• Page 264
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Pr.03-03=10% Frequency Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode) 60Hz 0: N o bias Lower than or equal t o bias 2: Greater than or equal t o bias 3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage…
• Page 265
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Pr. 03-03=10% F requency Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode) 60Hz 0: No bias Low er t han or equal to bias 54Hz 2: Greater t han or equal to bias 3: T he absolut e value of t he bias volt age…
• Page 266
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Pr.03-03=10% F requency Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode) 60Hz 0: No bias 54Hz Lower than or equal t o bias 2: Greater than or equal t o bias 3: T he absolute value of t he bias voltage…
• Page 267
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series F requency Pr. 03-03=-10% Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode) 60Hz 0: No bias Low er t han or equal t o bias 2: Great er t han or equal t o bias…
• Page 268
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series F requency Pr. 03-03=-10% 60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode) 0: No bias Lower t han or equal t o bias 2: Greater than or equal t o bias 3: T he absolute value of t he bias voltage…
• Page 269
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series F requency Pr. 03-03=-10% Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode) 60Hz 0: No bias Lower t han or equal t o bias 2: Greater t han or equal t o bias 3: T he absolut e value of t he bias voltage…
• Page 270
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series F requency Pr. 03-03=10% Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/ Negative Bias Mode) 60Hz 0: No bias Lower t han or equal t o bias 2: Greater t han or equal t o bias 3: The absolut e value of t he bias voltage…
• Page 271
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series F requency Pr. 03-03=10% Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode) 60Hz 0: No bias Lower than or equal t o bias 2: Greater than or equal t o bias 3: T he absolute value of t he bias voltage…
• Page 272
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series F requency Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode) 0: No bias 60Hz Lower t han or equal t o bias 2: Greater t han or equal t o bias 3: T he absolut e value of t he bias voltage…
• Page 273
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series F requency Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode) 0: No bias 60Hz Lower than or equal t o bias 2: Greater than or equal t o bias 3: T he absolute value of t he bias voltage…
• Page 274
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series F requency Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode) 0: No bias 60Hz Lower than or equal to bias 2: Great er than or equal to bias 3: T he absolute value of the bias volt age…
• Page 275
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Pr.00-21=0 (Dgit al keypad control and d run in F WD direction) F requency Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10% Pr.03-05 Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode) 60Hz 0: No bias…
• Page 276
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Pr.00-21=0 (Digit al keypad cont rol and run in F WD direct ion) F requency Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Volt age Input Bias (AUI ) = 10% Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode) 60Hz…
• Page 277
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Pr. 00-21=0 (Digital keypad control and run in F WD direct ion F requency Pr.03-05 Analog Posit ive Volt age Input Bias (AUI ) = 10% Pr.03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/N egat ive Bias Mode)
• Page 278
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Pr.00-21=0 (Digit al keypad control and run in F WD direct ion F requency Pr.03-05 Analog Posit ive Volt age Input Bias (AU I) = 10% Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode) 60Hz…
• Page 279
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Pr. 00-21=0 igit al keypad control and run in F WD direct ion) F requency Pr. 03-05 Analog Posit ive Voltage I nput Bias (AUI ) = 10% Pr.03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/N egat ive Bias Mode)
• Page 280
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Setting: 100.0 Settings -500.0~500.0% Parameters 03-03 to 03-14 are used when the source of frequency command is the analog voltage/current signal. Analog Input Filter Time (AVI) Analog Input Filter Time (ACI) Analog Input Filter Time (AUI) Factory Setting: 0.01…
• Page 281
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series loss of the ACI signal is recovered or drive is stop. Multi-function Output 1 (AFM1) Factory Setting: 0 Multi-function Output 2 (AFM2) Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0~23 Function Chart Settings Functions Descriptions Output frequency (Hz) Max.
• Page 282
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Settings 0~500.0% It is used to adjust the analog voltage level (Pr.03-20) that terminal AFM outputs. This parameter is set the corresponding voltage of the analog output 0. Analog Output 1 when in REV Direction (AFM1)
• Page 283
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series ACI Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: 4-20mA 1: 0-10V 2: 0-20mA When changing the input mode, please check if the switch of external terminal (SW3, SW4) corresponds to the setting of Pr.03-28~03-29.
• Page 284
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Reserve Analog Input Curve Selection Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Regular Curve 1: 3 point curve of AVI 2: 3 point curve of ACI 3: 3 point curve of AVI & ACI 4: 3 point curve of AUI 5: 3 point curve of AVI &…
• Page 285
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series there is no setting limit for ACI points. ACI Low Point Factory Setting: 4.00 Settings Pr.03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V Pr.03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA ACI Proportional Low Point Factory Setting: 0.00 Settings 0.00~100.00% ACI Mid Point Factory Setting: 12.00 Settings 03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V…
• Page 286
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Positive AUI Voltage High Point Factory Setting: 10.00 Settings 0.00~10.00V Positive AUI Voltage Proportional High Point Factory Setting: 100.00 Settings 0.00~100.00% When setting positive voltage AUI to frequency command, it 100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.01-00 Max.
• Page 287
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 04 Multi-Step Speed Parameters This parameter can be set during operation. 1st Step Speed Frequency 2nd Step Speed Frequency 3rd Step Speed Frequency 4th Step Speed Frequency 5th Step Speed Frequency 6th Step Speed Frequency…
• Page 288
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 04-07 F re que nc y 04-06 04-08 04-05 04-09 04-04 04-10 04-03 04-11 04-02 04-12 J OG F req. 04-01 01-22 04-13 04-00 04-14 Master Spee d 10 11 12 13 14 15…
• Page 289
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 04-22 04-03 4 step speed frequency Position command 1 (pulse) 04-24 04-04 5 step speed frequency Position command 1 (pulse) 04-26 04-05 6 step speed frequency Position command 1 (pulse) 04-28 04-06 7…
• Page 290
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Multi-step Target Position of P2P Maximum Speed of P2P Speed Status 1001 Position 9 04-31 04-32 04-08 1010 Position 10 04-33 04-34 04-09 1011 Position 11 04-35 04-36 04-10 1100 Position 12 04-37…
• Page 291
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 05 Motor Parameters This parameter can be set during operation. Motor Auto Tuning Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: No function 1: Rolling test for induction motor (Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current) 2: Rolling test for induction motor…
• Page 292
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Set Pr.05-00=6 to begin rolling test for IM motor flux curve. This function is available when the drive is in FOC/TQC Sensorless control. User may begin auto-tuning after setting up the motor information.
• Page 293
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series correct. For PM motor, set Pr.05-33=1 and complete the following settings according to your motor specifications, Pr.05-34 rated current, Pr.05-35 rated power, Pr.05-36 rated speed and Pr. 05-37 pole number. The acceleration time and deceleration time should be set according to your motor capacity.
• Page 294
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Rated Power of Induction Motor 1(kW) Factory Setting: #.## Settings 0~655.35 kW It is used to set rated power of the motor 1. The factory setting is the power of the drive. Rated Speed of Induction Motor 1 (rpm) Factory Setting: 1710（60Hz 4 poles）…
• Page 295
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current. Example: The rated current for 7.5HP (5.5kW) is 25A and factory setting is 22.5A. The range for setting will be 10~30A.(25*40%=10A and 25*120%=30A) Rated Power of Induction Motor 2 (kW) Factory Setting: #.##…
• Page 296
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Settings 0.00~600.00Hz Y-connection/△-connection Switch of Induction Motor IM Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Disable 1: Enable Delay Time for Y-connection/△-connection Switch of Induction Motor Factory Setting: 0.200 Settings 0.000~60.000 sec P.05-23 and Pr.05-25 are applied in the wide range motors and the motor coil will execute the switch of Y-connection/Δ-connection as required.
• Page 297
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series If switch poi nt is 60Hz, the accel . switch point i s 62Hz Decel. sw itch point is 58Hz Pr.05-23 switch △ Bandwidth is 2Hz frequency In this area, motor i s i n free run status .
• Page 298
  Inertia of Permanent Magnet Motor Factory Setting: 0.0 Settings 0.0~6553.5 kg.cm (0.0001kg.m This parameter setting is defined in kg-cm . If this measure is not familiar to you, please refer to the chart below. (Delta’s motor inertia chart is for reference purpose only.) 12-91…
• Page 299
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Delta Motor (Low inertia model) Rated Power(kW) 0.75 Rotor inertia (kg.m^2) 3.70E-06 1.77E-05 2.77E-05 6.80E-05 1.13E-04 2.65E-04 4.45E-04 Delta Motor (Mid to High Inertia model) Rated Power(kW) Rotor inertia (kg.m^2) 8.17E-04 8.41E-04 1.12E-03 1.46E-03 3.47E-03 8.17E-04 8.41E-04 1.12E-03 ※…
• Page 300
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 06 Protection Parameters This parameter can be set during operation. Low Voltage Level Factory Setting: Settings 230V Series: Frame A to D: 150.o~ 220.0 Vdc 180.0 Frame E and frames above E: 190.0~220.0V 200.0…
• Page 301
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series High-vo ltage a t DC si de Ov er-v ol tage detec ti on level Time Ou tpu t frequen cy F requenc y Held Deceleration c har acteristic when Ov er-Voltag e Stall…
• Page 302
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series During acceleration, the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value specified by Pr.06-03 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor. When this function is enabled, the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant until the current drops below the maximum value.
• Page 303
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Ov er-Curr ent D etec tion Level Pr . 06-04 s etting 06-04 Current Pr . 06-04 s et ting- rated dr ive c urrent X 5% Ov er-C urr ent Stall P revention…
• Page 304
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series When Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 are set to 1 or 3, it will display a warning message and won’t have an abnormal record. When Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 are set to 2 or 4, it will display a warning message and will have an abnormal record.
• Page 305
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 1: Standard motor 2: Disable It is used to prevent self-cooled motor overheats under low speed. User can use electronic thermal relay to limit driver’s output power. Electronic Thermal Characteristic for Motor 1 Electronic Thermal Characteristic for Motor 2 Factory Setting: 60.0…
• Page 306
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Over-heating Level (℃) Over-heating Level (℃) VFD450C23A/E VFD1100C43A/E VFD550C23A/E VFD1320C43A/E VFD750C23A/E VFD1600C43A/E VFD900C23A/E VFD1850C43A/E VFD007C43A/E VFD2200C43A/E VFD015C43A/E VFD2800C43A/E VFD022C43A/E VFD3150C43A/E VFD037C43A/E VFD3550C43A/E VFD040C43A/E Stall Prevention Limit Level Factory Setting: 50 Settings 0~100% (Refer to Pr.06-03, Pr.06-04) When operation frequency is larger than Pr.01-01;…
• Page 307
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 18: tH1o (TH1 open: IGBT over-heat protection error) 19: tH2o (TH2 open: capacitance over-heat protection error) 20: Reserved 21: Drive over-load (oL) 22: Electronics thermal relay 1 (EoL1) 23: Electronics thermal relay 2 (EoL2)
• Page 308
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 58: Communication Time-out (CE10) 59: PU Time-out (CP10) 60: Brake transistor error (bF) 61: Y-connection/△-connection switch error (ydc) 62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb) 63: Slip error (oSL) 64: Electromagnet switch error (ryF)
• Page 309
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series requirement. When the fault occurs, the corresponding terminals will be activated (It needs to convert binary value to decimal value to fill in Pr.06-23 to Pr.06-26). Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Fault Code current Volt.
• Page 310
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Fault Code current Volt. 36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0) ● 37: Over-current detection error (Hd1) ● 38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2) ● 39: occ IGBT short circuit detection error (Hd3) ●…
• Page 311
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Fault Code current Volt. 83: OPHL Vphase output phase loss ● 84: OPHL Wphase output phase loss ● 85~100: Reserved 101: CGdE CANopen software disconnect1 ●…
• Page 312
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Output Voltage at Malfunction Factory Setting: Read only Settings 0.0~6553.5V When malfunction occurs, user can check current output voltage. If it happens again, it will overwrite the previous record. DC Voltage at Malfunction Factory Setting: Read only Settings 0.0~6553.5V…
• Page 313
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Settings 0000h~FFFFh Status of Multi-function Output Terminal at Malfunction Factory Setting: Read only Settings 0000h~FFFFh When malfunction occurs, user can check the status of multi-function input/output terminals. If it happens again, it will overwrite the previous record.
• Page 314
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Ripple of Input Phase Loss Factory Setting:30.0 / 60.0 Settings 230V Series: 0.0~160.0 Vdc 460V Series: 0.0~320.0 Vdc Treatment for the detected Input Phase Loss （OrP） Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: warn, ramp to stop…
• Page 315
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series output current in the normal duty and Ratio*180% of output current in the heavy duty. The advantage is that it can provide higher output current when the setting is higher than the factory setting of carrier frequency.
• Page 316
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Derating curve diagram in the heavy duty (Pr.00-16=1) Pr.06-55=1 Pr.06-55=0 or 2 Pr.06-55=0 or 2 (40℃: UL open-type) (50℃: UL open-type) (30℃: UL type1 or open type_size by (40℃: UL type1 or open type_size by…
• Page 317
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Air flow rate for cooling Power dissipation of AC motor drive Flow Rate (cfm) Flow Rate (m /hr) Power Dissipation Model No. Loss External External Internal Total External Internal Total Internal Total (Heat sink)
• Page 318
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series PT100 Detection Level 1 Factory Setting:5.000 Settings 0.000~10.000V PT100 Detection Level 2 Factory Setting: 7.000 Settings 0.000~10.000V PT100 Level 1 Frequency Protection Factory Setting: 0.00 Settings 0.00~600.00 Hz PT100 operation Use AVI, AUI or ACI(set to 0-10V) for analog voltage input and select PT100 mode.
• Page 319
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series When Pr.06-58=0.00Hz, PT100 function is disabled. Example: A PT100 is installed to the drive. If motor temperature reache 135℃ (275°F) or higher, the drive will decrease motor frequency to the setting of Pr.06-58. Motor will operate at this frequency (Pr.06-58) till the motor temperature decreases to 135℃(275°F) or lower.
• Page 320
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Setting: Read only Settings 0~64799 min Pr.06-63 to Pr.06-68 are used to record the operation time for 6 malfunctions and it can also check if there is any wrong with the drive according to the internal time.
• Page 321
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Settings 0.0 ~ 6553.5 % Low Current Detection Time Factory Setting: 0.00 Settings 0.00 ~ 655.35 sec Treatment for low current Factory Setting: 0 0 : No function Settings 1 : warn and coast to stop…
• Page 322
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 07 Special Parameters This parameter can be set during operation. Software Brake Level Factory Setting: 380.0/760.0 Settings 230V series: 350.0~450.0Vdc 460V series: 700.0~900.0Vdc This parameter sets the DC-bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated. Users can choose the suitable brake resistor to have the best deceleration.
• Page 323
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration. When this setting is less than start frequency (Pr.01-09), the start-point for DC brake will start from the min. frequency. Output frequen cy…
• Page 324
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series The motor has the characteristics of big inertia and small obstruction. For example, in the equipment with big inertia wheel, it doesn’t need to wait to execute operation command until wheel is complete stop after re-start to save time.
• Page 325
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Output frequency Input B.B. signal Stop output voltage Disable B.B. signal Output voltage Waiting time 08.07 output current A Speed Search 07-09 Current Limit for Speed Search Speed Synchronization speed detection Time FWD Run B.B.
• Page 326
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Fault includes: bb,oc,ov,occ etc. To restart after oc, ov, occ, Pr.07-11 can not be set to 0. Auto Restart After Fault Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0~10 After fault (oc, ov, ov),occurs the AC motor drive can be reset/restarted automatically up to 10 times.
• Page 327
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series function is the AC motor drive decelerates to stop after momentary power loss. When the momentary power loss occurs, this function can be used for the motor to decelerate to 0 speed with deceleration stop method.
• Page 328
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Settings 0.00~600.00Hz Dwell Time at Decel. Factory Setting: 0.00 Settings 0.00~600.00 sec Dwell Frequency at Decel. Factory Setting: 0.00 Settings 0.00~600.00 Hz In the heavy load situation, Dwell can make stable output frequency temporarily, such as crane or elevator.
• Page 329
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 4: Stop by 4 deceleration time 5: System Deceleration 6: Automatic Deceleration Pr.07-20 determines AC motor drive stop method. When the multi-function input terminal is set to 10 or 18 and is activated, the drive will stop according to the setting in Pr.07-20.
• Page 330
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series For instance, if V/f curve is set at 200 VAC/50Hz and the input voltage is at 200V to 264VAC, then the motor Output Voltage will automatically be reduced to a maximum of 200VAC/50Hz. If the input voltage is at 180V to 200VAC, output voltage to motor and input power will be in direct proportion.
• Page 331
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Slip Compensation Gain (V/F and SVC control mode) Factory Setting: 0.00 Settings 0.00~10.00 The induction motor needs the constant slip to produce magnetic torque. It can be ignore in the higher motor speed, such as rated speed or 2-3% slip.
• Page 332
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 0: Disable The motor will have current wave motion in some specific area. It can improve this situation by setting this parameter. (When it is high frequency or run with PG, it can be set to 0. when the current wave motion happens in the low frequency, please increase Pr.05-29.)
• Page 333
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 08 High-function PID Parameters This parameter can be set during operation. Input Terminal for PID Feedback Factory Setting:0 Settings 0: No function 1: Negative PID feedback: input from external terminal AVI (Pr.03-00) 2: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip direction) 3: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
• Page 334
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Concept of PID control Proportional gain(P): the output is proportional to input. With only proportional gain control, there will always be a steady-state error. Integral time(I): the controller output is proportional to the integral of the controller input. To eliminate the steady-state error, an “integral part”…
• Page 335
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 8. Pr.08-01-08-03 will be set as required 8.1 If there is no vibration in the system, increase Pr.08-01(Proportional Gain (P)) 8.2 If there is no vibration in the system, reduce Pr.08-02(Integral Time (I)) 8.3 If there is no vibration in the system, increase Pr.08-03(Differential Time(D))
• Page 336
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series recommended to use this function in the serious interference. Upper limit of Integral Control Factory Setting:100.0 Settings 0.0~100.0% This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain (I) and therefore limits the Master Frequency.
• Page 337
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series P action only, and sometimes, if the integral component is functioning, the whole system will be vibrating. On such occasions, in order to make the P action’s vibration subsiding and the system stabilizing, the PD control could be utilized. In other words, this control is good for use with loadings of no brake functions over the processes.
• Page 338
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Feedback Signal Detection Time Factory Setting: 0.0 Settings 0.0~3600.0 sec Pr.08-08 is valid only if the feedback signal is ACI. This parameter sets the detection time of abnormal PID derative. If detection time is set to 0.0, detection function is disabled.
• Page 339
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Filter Time for PID Feedback Factory Setting: 5.0 Settings 0.1~300.0 sec When the PID control function is normal, it should calculate within a period of time and close to the setpoint value. Refer to the PID control diagram for details. When executing PID feedback control, if |PID reference target value –…
• Page 340
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 09 Communication Parameters The parameter can be set during the operation. M odbus RS- 485 When us ing communication devi ces, Pin 1~2,7, 8: Reserv ed connects AC dr ive with P C by us ing Pin 3, 6: GND Delt a I FD6530 or I FD6500.
• Page 341
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 9: 8, O, 1 for ASCII 10: 8, E, 2 for ASCII 11: 8, O, 2 for ASCII 12: 8, N, 1 for RTU 13: 8, N, 2 for RTU 14: 8, E, 1 for RTU…
• Page 342
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series （7 , O , 1） Start Stop parity 7-data bits 10-bits character frame 11-bit character frame (For RTU): （8 , N , 2） Start Stop Stop 8-data bits 11-bits character frame （8 , E , 1）…
• Page 343
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Contents of data: DATA (n-1) n×8-bit data, n<=16 ……. DATA 0 CRC check sum: CRC CHK Low 16-bit check sum consists of 2 8-bit characters CRC CHK High A silent interval of more than 10 ms Address (Communication Address) Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254.
• Page 344
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series CRC CHK Low Content of data address 2103H CRC CHK High CRC CHK Low CRC CHK High 06H: single write, write single data to register. Example: writing data 6000(1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H.
• Page 345
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Number of data ‘0’ ‘E’ LRC Check (count by byte) ‘4’ ‘8’ ‘1’ ‘3’ The first data content ‘8’ ‘8’ ‘0’ ‘F’ The second data content ‘A’ ‘0’ ‘9’ LRC Check ‘A’ RTU mode:…
• Page 346
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling, then repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H, then repeat step 3.
• Page 347
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 3. Address list Content Address Function GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number, for AC drive Parameters GGnnH example, the address of Pr 4-01 is 0401H. 0: No function Command 1: Stop…
• Page 348
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Content Address Function Bit9 1: Master frequency controlled by analog signal 1: Operation command controlled by Bit10 communication interface Bit11 1: Parameter locked Bit12 1: Enable to copy parameters from keypad Bit13~15 Reserved…
• Page 349
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Content Address Function 2217H Pulse input position (PG card PG2), maximum setting is 65535. 2218H Position command tracing error (P.) 2219H Display times of counter overload (0.00~100.00%) 221AH Display GFF in % (G.) 221BH Display DCbus voltage ripples (Unit: Vdc) (r.)
• Page 350
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Reserved Response Delay Time Factory Setting: 2.0 Settings 0.0~200.0ms This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive receives communication command as shown in the following. RS-485 BUS Response Message PC or PLC command…
• Page 351
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Reserved Communication Decoding Method Factory Setting: 1 Settings 0: Decoding Method 1 1: Decoding Method 2 Decoding Method 1 Decoding Method 2 Source of Digital Keypd Digital keypad controls the drive action regardless decoding method 1 or 2.
• Page 352
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Settings 1~254 CANopen Slave Address Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Disable 1~127 CANopen Speed Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: 1M 1: 500k 2: 250k 3: 125k 4: 100k (Delta only) 5: 50k CANopen Frequency Gain Factory Setting: 1.00…
• Page 353
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 5: Stop State CANopen Control Status Factory Setting: Read Only Settings 0: Not ready for use state 1: Inhibit start state 2: Ready to switch on state 3: Switched on state 4: Enable operation state…
• Page 354
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 4: Modbus-TCP Slave 5: EtherNet/IP Slave 6~8: Reserved Firmware Version of Communication Card Factory Setting: ## Settings Read only Product Code Factory Setting: ## Settings Read only Error Code Factory Setting: ## Settings…
• Page 355
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 8: 1Mbps Other Setting of DeviceNet Speed Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Disable 1: Enable It needs to use with Pr.09-71. Setting 0: the baud rate can only be set to 0, 1, 2 or 3.
• Page 356
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Password for Communication Card (Low word) Password for Communication Card (High word) Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0~255 Reset Communication Card Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Disable 1: Reset, return to factory setting Additional Setting for Communication Card…
• Page 357
  For EMC-PG01U, when setting Pr.10-00=2 (Delta encoder) make sure SW1 is switched to D (Delta type). If the setting for Pr.10-00, 10-01 and 10-02 has changed, please turn off the drive’s power and reboots to prevent PM motor stall. This mode is suggested for PM motor.
• Page 358
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads in a reverse run command 3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (L =reverse direction, H=forward direction) 4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input.
• Page 359
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series D riv er car d Gear Gear Motor load B1 or B2 A1 or A2 encoder is us ed at load side gear ratio ON = A2: B2 MI=48 OF F=A 1:B 1…
• Page 360
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Encoder Slip Range Factory Setting: 50 Settings 0~50% 0: Disable Detection Time of Encoder Slip Factory Setting: 0.5 Settings 0.0~10.0 sec Treatment for Encoder Stall and Slip Error Factory Setting: 2 Settings 0: Warn and keep operation…
• Page 361
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series needs 4096 pulses to rotate the motor a revolution. Assume that Pr.10-01=1024, Pr.10-02=1, Pr.10-16=1, Pr.00-20=5, MI=37 and ON, it needs 1024 pulses to rotate the motor a revolution. Position control diagram Position command…
• Page 362
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 1: Mechanical Frequency (base on pole pair) Reserved FOC&TQC Function Control Factory Setting: 0 0~65535 Settings Bit# Description ASR control at sensorless torque 0:use PI as ASR; 1:use P as ASR 1~10 Activate DC braking when executing zero torque command…
• Page 363
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series a shorter time constant. Top Limit of Frequency Deviation Factory Setting: 20.00 Settings 0.00~100.00Hz Pr.10-29 is for setting the maximum of frequency deviation. Resolver Pole Pair Factory Setting: 1 Settings 1~50 To use Pr.10-30 function, user must set Pr.10-00=3(Resolver Encoder) first.
• Page 364
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Setting: 20.00 Settings 0.00~600.00Hz Frequency Point when switch from PM Sensorless Observation mde to I/F mode Factory Setting: 20.00 Settings 0.00~600.00Hz I/F mode, low pass-filter time Factory Setting: 0.2 Settings 0.0~6.0 sec…
• Page 365
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Set frequency com man d (Hig her th an switch ing comm and) Big variation of curre nt or OC wh ile switch ing Perfo rm RUN co mm and Lower Per Unit of System Inertia (Pr.11-01)/…
• Page 366
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 11 Advanced Parameters This parameter can be set during operation. In this parameter group, ASR is the abbreviation for Adjust Speed Regulator System Control Factory Setting: 0 Settings 0: Auto tuning for ASR and APR…
• Page 367
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Pr.11-05 11-06 us e to adjust the 11-07 1. Pr. 11-01 valu e stren gth o f ze ro — 2. set Pr.11 -0 0 to bit 0=1 se rvo lo ck 11-08…
• Page 368
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth Factory Setting: 10 Settings 1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM) Zero-speed Bandwidth Factory Setting: 10 Settings 1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM) After estimating inertia and set Pr.11-00 to bit 0=1 (auto tuning), user can adjust parameters Pr.11-03, 11-04 and 11-05 separately by speed response.
• Page 369
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series PDFF Gain Value Factory Setting: 30 Settings 0~200% After finishing estimating and set Pr.11-00 to bit 0=1 (auto tuning), using Pr.11-13 to reduce overshoot. Please adjust PDFF gain value by actual situation. This parameter will be invalid when Pr.05-24 is set to 1.
• Page 370
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series π × ω(rad/s) value= Pr.05-03。 Po sitiv e to rque Forward mo tor mo de Rev ers e mot or mode 06-1 2 current limit 06-1 2 current limit Exte rnal ana lo g t ermin als E xt ernal an alog t erminals Pr.
• Page 371
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series output tor que Fl ux weakening cur ve 11-21 11-22 100% 01-01 frequency 01-35 Speed Response of Flux Weakening Area Factory Setting: 65 Settings 0: Disable 0~150% It is used to control the speed in the flux weakening area. The larger value is set in Pr.11-23, the faster acceleration/deceleration will generate.
• Page 372
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 11-46 11-45 Ou tput Frequency PG Fe edback 10-19 10-0 0 10-0 1 M I=d3 5 M O=d 39 Time Max. Torque Command Factory Setting: 100 Settings 0~500% The upper limit of torque command is 100%.
• Page 373
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Factory Setting: 0.0 Settings 0.0~100.0% This parameter is torque offset. The motor rated torque is 100%. Calculation equation for motor rated torque: motor rated torque: ; P(W) value= Pr.05-02; ω π × ω(rad/s) value= Pr.05-03。…
• Page 374
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series The drive will save the setting to the record before power turns off. Low-pass Filter Time of Torque Command Factory Setting: 0.000 Settings 0.000~1.000 sec When the setting is too long, the control will be stable but the control response will be delay. When the setting is too short, the response will be quickly but the control maybe unstable.
• Page 375
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series as 0 (the torque mode), if torque command is 0%, the motor will produce excitation current but no torque current. When Pr.11-39 is set as 1 (the speed mode), if torque command is 0%, the AC motor drive can still produce torque current through speed controller to prevent motor race and the drive will also atomatically adjust the speed to 0 when the speed command is not equal to 0.
• Page 376
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Position M ax. Fre quency Speed 11-4 3 11 -44 11-45 Decel. time Accel. tim e 12-169…

• Page 377: Chapter 13 Warning Codes

  Chapter 13 Warning Codes|C2000 Series Chapter 13Warning Codes D i s p l ay e r r o r s i g n a l Warning A b b r e v i a t e e r ro r c o d e CE01 T h e c o d e i s d i sp l a y e d a s s h o w n o n K P C — C E 0 1 .

• Page 378
  Chapter 13 Warning Codes|C2000 Series Display on LCM Keypad Descriptions Warning IGBT over-heating warning Over heat 1 warn Warning Capacity over-heating warning Over heat 2 warn Warning PID feedback error PID FBK Error ACI signal error Warning When Pr03-19 is set to 1 and 2.
• Page 379
  Chapter 13 Warning Codes|C2000 Series Display on LCM Keypad Descriptions Warning Over torque 2 Over Torque 2 Warning Motor over-heating Motor Over Heat Warning Over slip Over Slip Warn Warning Auto tuning processing Auto tuning Warning CAN guarding time-out 1…
• Page 380
  Chapter 13 Warning Codes|C2000 Series Display on LCM Keypad Descriptions Warning CAN index error CIdn CAN/S Idx exceed Warning CAN station address error CAdn CAN/S Addres set Warning CAN memory error CFrn CAN/S FRAM fail Warning PLC download error PLod…
• Page 381
  Chapter 13 Warning Codes|C2000 Series Display on LCM Keypad Descriptions Warning PLC download fail PLdF Download fail Warning PLC scan time exceed PLSF Scane time fail Warning CAN Master guarding error PCGd CAN/M G uard err Warning CAN Master bus off…
• Page 382
  Chapter 13 Warning Codes|C2000 Series Display on LCM Keypad Descriptions Warning Low voltage of communication card ECLv ExCom pwr loss Warning Communication card in test mode ECtt ExCom Test Mode Warning DeviceNet bus-off ECbF ExCom Bus off Warning DeviceNet no power…
• Page 383
  Chapter 13 Warning Codes|C2000 Series Display on LCM Keypad Descriptions Warning Communication card returns to default setting ECrF ExCom Rtn def Warning Modbus TCP exceed maximum communication value ECo0 ExCom MTC P over Warning EtherNet/IP exceed maximum communication value ECo1…

• Page 384: Chapter 14 Fault Codes And Descriptions

  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions |C2000 Series Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions D i s p l ay e r r o r s i g n a l Warning A b b r e v i a t e e r ro r c o d e CE01 T h e c o d e i s d i sp l a y e d a s s h o w n o n K P C — C E 0 1 .

• Page 385
  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions |C2000 Series Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Short-circuit is detected Fault between upper bridge Return to the factory and lower bridge of the IGBT module Short Circuit 1. Check if the input voltage falls within the rated DC BUS over-voltage AC motor drive input voltage range.
• Page 386
  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions |C2000 Series Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Check Power Source Input if all 3 input phases are Fault connected without loose contacts. Phase Loss For models 40hp and above, please check if the fuse for the AC input circuit is blown.
• Page 387
  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions |C2000 Series Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions 1. Check the setting of electronics thermal relay Fault Electronics thermal relay (Pr.06-28) EoL2 2 protection 2. Take the next higher power AC motor drive model…
• Page 388
  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions |C2000 Series Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Fault Reboots the power. If fault code is still displayed on the CC (current clamp) keypad please return to the factory cc HW error Fault Reboots the power. If fault code is still displayed on the…
• Page 389
  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions |C2000 Series Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Fault Check the pulse wiring Pulse input error PGr1 Return to the factory PG Ref error Fault 1. Check the pulse wiring Pulse input loss PGr2 2.
• Page 390
  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions |C2000 Series Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Fault Data is written to read-only Check if the communication address is correct address PC slave fault Fault Modbus transmission time-out CE10 PC time out Fault…
• Page 391
  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions |C2000 Series Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Fault W phase short circuit W phase oc Electric valve switch error when executing Soft Start. Fault Do not disconnect RST when drive is still operating.
• Page 392
  Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions |C2000 Series Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions Fault CANopen bus off error CbFE Can bus off Fault CANopen index error CIdE Can bus Index Err Fault CANopen station address error CAdE Can bus Add. Err…
• Page 393
  15.1 CANopen Overview 15.2 Wiring for CANopen 15.3 How to control by CANopen 15.3.1 CANopen Control Mode Selection 15.3.2 Delta Defined Control Mode (There are two modes available) 15.3.3 DS402 Standard Control Mode 15.3.4 Remarks to Control Modes 15.4 CANopen Supporting Index 15.5 CANopen Fault Code…
• Page 394
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series 15.1 CANopen Overview CANopen Protocol CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol, and was designed for motion-oriented machine control networks, such as handling systems. Version 4 of CANopen (CiA DS301) is standardized as EN50325-4. The CANopen specifications cover application layer and communication profile (CiA DS301), as well as a framework for programmable devices (CiA 302), recommendations for cables and connectors (CiA 303-1) and SI units and prefix representations (CiA 303-2).
• Page 395
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series Pre-Defined Connection Set To reduce configuration effort for simple networks, CANopen define a mandatory default identifier allocation scheme. The 11-bit identifier structure in predefined connection is set as follows: COB Identifier (CAN Identifier) Function Code…
• Page 396
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series Initializing (15) Reset Application (10) (11) (16) Reset Communication (2)F (14) Pre-Operation ABCD (13) Stopped AB (12) Operation ABCD (1) After power is applied, it is auto in initialization state A: NMT (2) Enter pre-operational state automatically…
• Page 397
  Type number 252 indicates the data is updated (but not sent) immediately after receiving SYNC. Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR. Type number 254: Delta CANopen doesn’t support this transmission format. Type number 255 indicates the data is asynchronous transmission.
• Page 398
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series All PDO transmission data must be mapped to index via Object Dictionary. Example: Master transmits data to Slave PDO1 CAN(H) CAN(L) Master Slave PDO1 data value Data 0, Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, Data 4, Data 5, Data 6, Data 7,…
• Page 399
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series Example: Master send NM message to slave 1 for RESET request. Slave 1 responds no error Slave 1 responds a boot up message Master enter Index6040 = 7EH in slave 1 Slave 1 responds OK…
• Page 400
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series 15.2 Wiring for CANopen An external adapter card: EMC-COP01 is used for CANopen wiring; establish CANopen to VFD C2000 connection. The link is enabled by using RJ45 cable. The two farthest ends must be terminated with 120Ω…
• Page 401
  CANopen baud rate setting: set Pr.09.37 (CANopen Baud Rate: 1M(0), 500K(1), 250K(2), 125K(3), 100K(4) and 50K(5)) CANopen decode method setting: set Pr.09.40 to 0 (Delta decoding method). It provides two decoding method by using Pr.09-30 and the default setting of the drive is in decoding method 2 (Pr.09-30=1).
• Page 402
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series setting is completed, press Pr.00-02=7 for reset.) CANopen baud rate setting: set Pr.09.37 (CANBUS Baud Rate: 1M(0), 500K(1), 250K(2), 125K(3), 100K(4) and50K(5)) Set multiple input functions to Quick Stop (it can also be enable or disable, default setting is disable).
• Page 403
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series Power Start Fault Reaction Active Disable X0XX1111 Not Ready to Switch On Fault X0XX0000 X0XX1000 XXXXXXX Switch On Disable X1XX0000 0XXXXX0X 0XXXXX0X 0XXXX110 0XXXX01X Disable QStop=1 Disable QStop=0 Ready to Switch On 0XXXXX0X X01X0001…
• Page 404
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series 15.3.4 Remarks to Control Modes C2000 series offers 3 control modes for CANopen. Please refer to the following definitions for the index setting of each control modes: When CANopen is set in different control mode, the Index Setting is different:…
• Page 405
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series 15.4 CANopen Supporting Index Basic Index Support by C2000: Index Sub Definition R/W Size Note Factory Setting 1000H Device type 00010192H Error register 1001H 1005H COB-ID SYNC message Unit: us The setting value should be in a…
• Page 406
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series Index Sub Definition Factory Setting R/W Size Note 00000200H+Node- COB-ID used by PDO RW U32 00:Acyclic& Synchronous Transmission Type 5 RW 01~240:Cyclic & Synchronous 255:Asynchronous Number 80000300H+Node- COB-ID used by PDO RW U32 1401H 00: Acyclic &…
• Page 407
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series Index Sub Definition R/W Size Note Factory Setting Number 00000180H+Node- COB-ID used by PDO RW U32 00: Acyclic & Synchronous Transmission Type 5 RW 01~240:Cyclic & Synchronous 1800H 255:Asynchronous Unit: 100us Inhibit time 0 RW U16…
• Page 408
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series Index Sub Definition Factory Setting R/W Size Note 3.Mapped Object 0 RW U32 4.Mapped Object 0 RW U32 Number 4 RW 1.Mapped Object 20260110H RW U32 1A01H 2.Mapped Object 20266110H RW U32 3.Mapped Object 20266210H RW U32 4.Mapped Object…
• Page 409
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series Factory Index Sub Definition Size Note Setting Reverse Switch Direction Bit6~7 step acceleration/deceleration step acceleration/deceleration Bit8~15 Reserved 2 vl target velocity（Hz） Bit0 E.F. ON 3 Other trigger Bit1 Reset Bit2~15 Reserved 2021H 0 Number…
• Page 410
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series Factory Index Sub Definition Size Note Setting Display actual output frequency 4 Display DC-BUS voltage 5 Display output voltage 6 Display output power angle 7 Display output power in kW Display actual motor speed…
• Page 411
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series Factory Index Sub Definition Size Note Setting Control Mode display: 0= Speed control mode (SPD), 1= torque control mode Present operating carrier frequency of drive Descriptions Index sub R/W Size Speed Mode Position Mode…
• Page 412
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series Descriptions Index sub R/W Size Speed Mode Position Mode Home Mode Torque Mode bit DefinitionPriority (unsigned decimal) 04h RW U16 Position 05h RW S32 command 06h RW Torque command 07h RW U16 (signed decimal)
• Page 413
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series Factory Index Sub Definition R/W Size Unit Mode Note Setting 5 slow down on slow down ramp and stay in QUICK STOP 6 slow down on quick stop ramp and stay in QUICK STOP…
• Page 414
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series Factory Index Definition Size Note Setting Bit 4 Bit 5 MO3 (Extension card) Bit 6 MO4 (Extension card) Bit 7 MO5 (Extension card) Bit 8 MO6 (Extension card) Bit 9 MO7 (Extension card) Bit 10…
• Page 415
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series 15.5 CANopen Fault Code CANopen CANopen fault Display Fault code Description fault code register (bit 0~7) Fault 0001H Over-current during acceleration 2213 H Oc at accel 0002H Over-current during deceleration 2213 H Oc at decel…
• Page 416
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series CANopen CANopen fault Display Fault code Description fault code register (bit 0~7) Over-voltage at stop. Hardware failure in Fault 000AH current detection 3210H Ov at stop Fault DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00…
• Page 417
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series CANopen CANopen fault Display Fault code Description fault code register (bit 0~7) Fault 0014H Power RST off FF02H Power RST OFF Overload. The AC motor drive detects excessive drive output current. Fault NOTE: The AC motor drive can…
• Page 418
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series CANopen CANopen fault Display Fault code Description fault code register (bit 0~7) Fault Fault 001FH Internal EEPROM can not be read. 5530H EoL2 Thermal relay 2 EEPROM read Err Fault Fault 0021H U-phase error…
• Page 419
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series CANopen CANopen fault Display Fault code Description fault code register (bit 0~7) Fault Fault PG feedback loss 002BH 7301H EoL2 PGF2 Thermal relay 2 PG Fbk Loss Fault Fault PG feedback stall 002BH 7301H…
• Page 420
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series CANopen CANopen fault Display Fault code Description fault code register (bit 0~7) Password will be locked if three fault Fault Fault 0034H passwords are entered FF26H EoL2 Pcod Thermal relay 2 Password Error Fault…
• Page 421
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series CANopen CANopen fault Display Fault code Description fault code register (bit 0~7) Overslip error. Slip exceeds Pr.05.26 Fault Fault limit and slip duration exceeds Pr.05.27 003FH FF28H setting. Thermal relay 2 Over slip Error…
• Page 422
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series CANopen CANopen fault Display Fault code Description fault code register (bit 0~7) Fault Fault 0063H CPU command error 6000H TRAP Thermal relay 2 CPU Trap Error Fault Fault 0065H Guarding time-out 1 8130H CGdE…
• Page 423
  Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series 15.6 CANopen LED Function There are two CANopen flash signs: RUN and ERR. RUN LED: LED status Condition CANopen State Initial Blinking Pre-Operation Single flash Stopped Operation ERR LED: LED status Condition/ State No Error…

• Page 424: Chapter 16 Plc Function

  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Chapter 16 PLC Function 16.1 PLC Overview 16.2 Precautions for Using PLC 16.3 Start-up 16.4 PLC Ladder Diagram 16.5 PLC Devices 16.6 Commands 16.7 Error Code and Troubleshoot 16.8 CANopen Master Application 16.9 Descriptions of PLC Modes and Controls (Speed, Torque, Homing and Position) 16.10 Internal Communication for Master Control…

• Page 425
  CANopen slave supports two control modes, speed mode and torque mode. 16.1.2 Ladder Diagram Editor – WPLSoft WPLSoft is a program editor of Delta DVP-PLC series and C2000 series for WINDOWS. Besides general PLC program planning and general WINDOWS editing functions, such as cut, paste, copy, multi-windows, WPLSoft also provides various Chinese/English comment editing and other special functions (e.g.
• Page 426
  PLC station using Pr.09-35 but station address must be different to the AC motor drive’s station address(Pr.09-00). C2000 series offers 2 communication ports for PLC program upload and download. Refer to the figure follows for port location. The communication protocol of Channel 1 is always 19200,8,N,2。…
• Page 427
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series H 0.00Hz A 0.00Hz C _ _ _ _ _ When PLC is in PLC Run or PLC Stop mode, Pr.00-02 (settings 9 and 10) are disabled. When Pr.00-02 is set to 6, PLC function settings will return to factory settings.
• Page 428
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series 16.3 Start-up 16.3.1 The Steps for PLC Execution Please operate PLC functions by following the steps indicate below: Press menu key on KPC-CC01 select 3: PLC ENTER. MENU F 60.00Hz 1.Pr Setup 1.Disable H 0.00Hz 2.Copy Pr…
• Page 429
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series When switching the page from PLC to PLC2, it will stop PLC. Again the motion of PLC (Execute/Stop) is controlled by WPL editor. The control of external terminals follows the same method. NOTE When input/output terminals (FWD REV MI1~MI8 MI10~15, Relay1, Relay2 RY10~RY15, MO1~MO2 MO10~MO11,) are used in PLC program, they cannot be used in other places.
• Page 430
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series 16.2.3 WPLSoft Installation Download PLC program toC2000: Refer to D.3 to D.7 for program coding and download the editor (WPLSoft V2.09) at DELTA website http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/ 16.2.4 Program Input 16.2.5 Program Download Please download the program by following steps: Step 1.
• Page 431
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series After finishing Step 2, the program will be downloaded from WPLSoft to the AC motor drive by the communication format. 16.2.6 Program Monitor If you execute “start monitor” in the communication item during executing PLC, the ladder diagram will be shown as follows.
• Page 432
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series 16.3 Ladder Diagram 16.3.1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram Read input state from outside Start Calculate the result by ladder diagram algorithm (it doesn’t M100 X3 Repeats the sent to the outer output…
• Page 433
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series In conclusion, each internal storage unit occupies fixed storage unit. When using these equipments, the corresponding content will be read by bit, byte or word. Brief introduction to the internal devices of PLC: Internal Device…
• Page 434
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series and counter value. The data register is used to store data or parameters. It stores 16-bit binary number, i.e. a word, in each register. It uses two continuous number of data register to store double words.
• Page 435
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Multiple output none Output command of coil Y, M drive Basic command/ Basic command, Application Application command command Inverse logic none 16.3.3 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram The program edited method is from left power line to right power line. (The right power line will be omitted during the edited of WPLSoft.) After editing a row, go to editing the next row.
• Page 436
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series The explanation of command order: The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram LD (LDI) command: give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block. LD command LD command AND Block OR Block The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD.
• Page 437
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series ANB command ORB command: a block connects to a device or a block in parallel. ORB command If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB, they should be combined to blocks or network from up to down or from left to right.
• Page 438
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series 16.3.4 The Example for Designing Basic Program Start, Stop and Latching In the same occasions, it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start and stop switch. Therefore, if you want to keep the action, you should design latching circuit. There are…
• Page 439
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Example 5: Interlock control The figure above is the circuit of interlock control. Y1 and Y2 will act according to the start contact X1 and X2. Y1 and Y2 will act not at the same time, once one of them acts and the other won’t act.
• Page 440
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series The vibrating circuitry of cycle time ΔT (On) +ΔT (Off): The figure above uses timer T0 to control coil Y1 to be ON. After Y1 is ON, timer T0 will be closed at the next scan period and output Y1. The oscillating circuit will be shown as above. (n is the setting of timer and it is decimal number.
• Page 441
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Example 11: Output delay circuit, in the following example, the circuit is made up of two timers. No matter input X0 is ON or OFF, output Y4 will be delay. 5 seconds 3 seconds Example12: Extend Timer Circuit In this circuit, the total delay time from input X0 is close and output Y1 is ON= (n1+n2)* T.
• Page 442
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series 16.4 PLC Devices Function Items Specifications Remarks Stored program, cyclic scan Control Method system Batch processing (when END I/O refresh instruction is I/O Processing Method instruction is executed) available Basic commands (minimum 0.24 Application commands (1 ~…
• Page 443
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series 16.4.1 Devices Functions The Function of Input/output Contacts The function of input contact X: input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by connecting with input equipment. It is unlimited usage times for contact A or contact B of each input contact X in program.
• Page 444
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Double Word Word Byte Nibble Octal Number (OCT) The numbers of external input and output terminal of DVP-PLC use octal number. Example: External input: X0~X7, X10~X17… (device number) External output: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17… (device number) Decimal Number, DEC The suitable time for decimal number to be used in DVP-PLC system.
• Page 445
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series : It will reset to Off when power loss during running. Its 1. Auxiliary relay for general state will be Off when power on after power loss. : Each special auxiliary relay has its special function.
• Page 446
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Example: RST C0 C0 K5 1. When X0=On, RST command is executed, C0 reset to 0 and output contact reset to Off. 2. When X1 is from Off to On, counter will count up (add 1).
• Page 447
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Special Read(R)/ Function Write(W) M1023 Divisor is 0 Read only M1024 Reserved M1025 RUN(ON) / STOP(OFF) the AC motor drive Read/Write M1026 The operation direction of the AC motor drive (FWD: OFF, REV: ON)
• Page 448
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Special Read(R)/ Function Write(W) M1068 Reserved M1079 M1070 Homing complete Read only M1071 Home error Read only M1072 Reserved M1079 16.4.3 Special Registers Read(R)/ Special D Function Write(W) D1000 Reserved D1001 Read only PLC firmware version…
• Page 449
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Read(R)/ Special D Function Write(W) D1035 D1036 AC motor drive error code Read only D1037 AC motor drive output frequency Read only D1038 DC Bus voltage Read only D1039 Output voltage Read only D1040 Analog output value AFM1 (-100.00~100.00%)
• Page 450
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Read(R)/ Special D Function Write(W) D1114 D1115 Synchronous time cycle of internal communication Read only D1116 Internal communication node error Read only D1117 Corresponding on-line bit of internal communication node Read only D1118 Random value…
• Page 451
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Read(R)/ Special D Function Write(W) D1168 Reference status H of internal communication node 4 Read only D1169 D1170 Control command of internal communication node 5 Read/Write D1171 Mode of internal communication node 5 Read/Write…
• Page 452
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Power Factory Special D Function Failure Setting Memory D1078 SDO fault (error code L) D1079 SDO fault (error code H) D1080 Reserved D1081 Reserved D1082 Reserved D1083 Reserved D1084 Reserved D1085 Reserved D1086 Reserved…
• Page 453
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Slave No. 8 D2700 Station number D2701 Factory code(L) D2799 Mapping address 4(H)of receiving station Slave No. 0~7 Pre-defined Special D Function Save setting Station number of slave No. n D2000+100* Setting range: 0~127 0: CANopen disable The category of slave No.
• Page 454
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Speed Control Slave No. 0~7 Pre-define Special D Function Save d Setting Index 1 2 3 4 6042H-001 D2012+100*n Target speed of slave No. n ● 6043H-001 D2013+100*n Actual speed of slave No. n ●…
• Page 455
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series 20XXH address corresponds to MI MO AI AO. Slave No. n=0~7 Pre-defined Special D Function Save Setting Index 1 2 3 4 2026H-011 D2026+100*n MI status of slave No. n ● 2026H-411 D2027+100*n MO setting of slave No. n ●…
• Page 456
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Pre-defined Special D Function Save Setting The mapping address 2(H) for slave No.n D2046+100*n 2026H transmitting station 2 The mapping address 3(L) for slave No. n D2047+100*n 6210H transmitting station 2 The mapping address 3(H) for slave No.n…
• Page 457
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Pre-defined Special D Function Save Setting The mapping address 2(H) for slave No.n D2071+100*n 6043H receiving station 1 The mapping address 3(L) for slave No. n D2072+100*n receiving station 1 The mapping address 3(H) for slave No.n…
• Page 458
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Pre-defined Special D Function Save Setting The mapping address 3(L) for slave No. n D2096+100*n receiving station 4 The mapping address 3(H) for slave No.n D2097+100*n receiving station 4 The mapping address 4(L) for slave No. n…
• Page 459
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series 16.5 Commands 16.5.1 Basic Commands Commands Commands Function Operands Load contact A X, Y, M, T, C Load contact B X, Y, M, T, C Series connection with A contact X, Y, M, T, C…
• Page 460
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series End Command Commands Function Operands Program end Other Command Commands Function Operands No function Inverse operation result Indicator 16.5.2 Explanation for the Command Mnemonic Function Load A contact X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399 Operand －…
• Page 461
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Mnemonic Function Series connection- A contact X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399 Operand － The AND command is used in the series connection of A contact. The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first, and then to perform the “AND”…
• Page 462
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Command code: Operation: Ladder diagram: Load contact A of Example Connect to contact A of X1 in parallel Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function Parallel connection- B contact X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399 Operand －…
• Page 463
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Command code: Operation: Ladder diagram: Example Load contact A of X0 Block A Connect to contact B of X1 in series Load contact B of X2 Connect to contact A of Block B X3 in series…
• Page 464
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Mnemonic Function Output coil X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399 Operand － － － － Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device. Motion of coil contact: OUT command Contact…
• Page 465
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Command code: Operation: Ladder diagram Example Load contact A of X0 Clear contact Y5 Mnemonic Function 16-bit timer T0~T159, K0~K32,767 Operand T0~T159, D0~D399 When TMR command is executed, the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to count.
• Page 466
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Mnemonic Function Master control Start/Reset MC/MCR N0~N7 Operand 1. MC is the main-control start command. When the MC command is executed, the execution of commands between MC and MCR will not be interrupted. When MC…
• Page 467
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Disable N0 common series connection contact Load A contact of X10 Enable N0 common series connection contact Load A contact of X0 Enable N0 common series connection contact Load A contact of X1 Drive Y0 coil…
• Page 468
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Command code: Operation: Ladder diagram: Start X0 falling-edge Example detection Series connection A contact of X1 Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function Rising-edge series connection ANDP X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399 Operand － ANDP command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ rising-edge detection.
• Page 469
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Command code: Operation: Ladder diagram: Load A contact of X0 Example X1 rising-edge detection in parallel connection Drive Y1 coil Mnemonic Function Falling-edge parallel connection X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399 Operand － The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s falling-edge detection.
• Page 470
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Command code: Operation: Ladder diagram: Load contact A of X0 Example M0 falling-edge output Load contact A of M0 Y0 latched (ON) Timing Diagram: Time for one scan cycle Mnemonic Function Program End None…
• Page 471
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Mnemonic Function Indicator P0~P255 Operand Indicator P allows API 00 CJ command and API 01 CALL command to skip from 0. Though it is not necessary to start from number 0, same number can not be used twice or serious error would occur.
• Page 472
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Mnemonic Codes STEPS Function Command 16-bit 32-bit 16bit 32bit Contact Logical Operation ANDl DANDl AND# Contact Logical Operation AND^ DAND^ AND# Contact Logical Operation OR& DOR& OR＃ Contact Logical Operation DOR| OR＃ Contact Logical Operation DOR^ OR＃…
• Page 473
  － － S: Operand S can designate P. Flag signal: None Operand S of C2000 series can designate P0~P63. 1. S: The pointer of call subroutine. Explanation 2. Edit the subroutine designated by the pointer after FEND instruction. 3. If only CALL instruction is in use, it can call subroutines of the same pointer number with no limit of times.
• Page 474
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series － The end of the main program (First End) FEND 16-bit command (1 STEP) Bit Devices Word Devices FEND － － H KnX KnY KnM T Operands: 32-bit command No operand － － －…
• Page 475
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Compare Bit Devices Word Devices H KnX KnY KnM T 16-bit command ( 7 STEPS) CMPP ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32bits command (13 STEPS) ＊…
• Page 476
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Zone Compare Bit Devices Word Devices H KnX KnY KnM T 16-bit command (9 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ZCPP ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (17 STEPS) ＊…
• Page 477
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Moving the data 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices MOVP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊…
• Page 478
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Block Move BMOV Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (7 STEPS) H KnX KnY KnM T BMOV BMOVP ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ －…
• Page 479
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series To avoid coincidence of the device numbers to be moved designated by the two Example operands and cause confusion, please be aware of the arrangement on the designated device numbers. When S > D, the BMOV command is processed in the order as 1→2→3 BMOV When S <…
• Page 480
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Remarks Flags and the positive/negative sign of the values: Zero flag Zero flag 16 bit: Zero flag -2, -1, 0 -32,768 -1, 0 32,767 The highest bit The highest bit Borrow flag Carry flag…
• Page 481
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series BIN Multiplication 16-bit command (7 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices MULP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (13 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊…
• Page 482
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series BIN Division Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (7 STEPS) DIVP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (13 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊…
• Page 483
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Increment: BIN plus 1 16-bit command (3 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices INCP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (5 STEPS) Operands: none － － － － Flag signal: none…
• Page 484
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Decrement: BIN minus 1 16-bit command (3 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices DECP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (5 STEPS) Operands: none － － － － Flag signal: none…
• Page 485
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Rotate to the Right Bit Devices Word Devices 16 bit command (5 STEPS) RORP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ － － － － Operands: Flag signal: M1022 Carry flag…
• Page 486
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Rotate to the Left 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices ROLP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ － － － － Operands: D: if in KnY and KnM, only K4 (16-bit) is valid…
• Page 487
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Zero Reset ZRST Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (5 STEPS) H KnX KnY KnM T ZRST ZRSTP ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command Operands: － － －…
• Page 488
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Contact Logical Operation LD# 215~ 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices ZRSTP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊…
• Page 489
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Contact Logical Operation AND# 218~ AND# 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices AND# ZRSTP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS) ＊…
• Page 490
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Contact Logical operation OR# 221~ 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices ZRSTP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊…
• Page 491
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Load Compare※ 224~ LD※ 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices LD※ ZRSTP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32 位 bits command (9 STEPS) ＊…
• Page 492
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series AND Compare※ 232~ AND※ 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices AND※ ZRSTP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊…
• Page 493
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series OR Compare※ 240~ OR※ 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices OR※ ZRSTP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEPS) ＊ ＊ ＊…
• Page 494
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series 16.5.5 Description to drive’s special commands Read the AC motor drive’s parameters 16-bit command (5 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices RPRP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ － －…
• Page 495
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series PID control for the AC motor drive FPID Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (9 STEPS) H KnX KnY KnM T FPID FPIDP ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ － － －…
• Page 496
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Operation control of the AC motor drive FREQ 16-bit command (7 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices FREQ FREQP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ － － －…
• Page 497
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Torque Control of AC Motor Drive TORQ 16-bit command (7 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices KnX KnY KnM TORQ TORQ P ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ ＊ － － － － Operands: None…
• Page 498
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Point to Point Position Control of AC Motor Drive DPOS 16-bit command (7 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices KnX KnY KnM － － － － ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command (5 steps) DPOS DPOSP…
• Page 499
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series 16-bit command (7 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices FREQ FREQP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ － － － － ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ Flag signal: M1028 Operand: none…
• Page 500
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Write CANopen slave data CANTX Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (7 STEPS) H KnX KnY KnM T FREQ FREQP ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ ＊ 32-bit command ＊ ＊ － － －…
• Page 501
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Update the mapping special D of CANopen CANFLS 16-bit command (7 STEPS) Bit Devices Word Devices FREQ FREQP H KnX KnY KnM T ＊ ＊ 32-bit command Operands: None － － － － Flag signal: M1028 D: the special D for update.
• Page 502
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series 16.6 Error and Troubleshoot Fault Fault Descript Corrective Action PLiC Internal communication signal off Check if shielded wire is properly inserted to communication port COM1. Check if there is error in the program and…
• Page 503
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series 16.7 CANopen Master Application Simple control of multiple-axes for certain application can be done by C2000 if the device supports CANopen protocol. One of the C2000 could acts as Master to perform simple synchronous control, e.g.
• Page 504
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series To control the slave address and corresponding station. For example, control 2 stations of the slave (max. 8 stations synchronous control), if the station number is 21 and 22, set D2000 and D2100 to 20 and 21 and then set D2200, D2300, D2400, D2500, D2600 and D2700 to 0.
• Page 505
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series be write in “stop” status, pleas switch PLC to “stop”.) Another method is by setting D1091. Set the corresponding bit of the excluding slave to 0 (slave station range from No.1~8). For example, if the user wants to exclude slave No.
• Page 506
  Editor setting at Setting> Communication Setting) Step 5: Setting the Slave station number, communication speed, operation source and command source CANopen communication is supported by Delta C2000 series and EC series AC motor drive. The corresponding slave and CANopen speed are shown as below: 16-83…
• Page 507
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Corresponding Parameter of Drive Value Definition C2000 Slave Disable CANopen Hardware Interface 09-36 09-20 address 1~127 CANopen communication address 500K CANopen 250K 09-37 09-21 speed 125K 100K Source of 00-21 operation 02-01 command Source of…
• Page 508
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Characteristic Characteristic line impedance line impedance Step 7: Activate PLC Control Function Download the program after coding is complete and switch PLC mode to Run status. Then reboots the power for Slave and Master. Please refer to CANMaster Test 1 vs. 2 driver.dvp.
• Page 509
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Step 4: Coding Real-time corresponding action: the data can be Read/Write directly to the corresponding special “D” register. Non Real-time corresponding action: Read: Reading is made by CANRX command. When reading process is complete, M1066=1.
• Page 510
  PG offset angle process after auto-tuning. Please refer to Pr.12-58 and Pr.05-00 for more detail. ※ Set up Delta ECMA series PM motor by enter motor parameters, follow the motor parameters shown in Delta Servo Motor Catalogue. It is not required to execute auto-tuning for using Delta ECMA series PM motors.
• Page 511
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Special D Descriptions D1050 Actual mode (0:Speed, 1: Position, 2: Torque, 3: Homing) Control command for Speed Mode: FREQ(P) Target speed 1st step accel. time 1st step decel. time Example of Speed Control Mode: If the drive is in FOC control mode, please auto-tuning the motor before setting PLC control mode to speed control.
• Page 512
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Torque Control: The corresponding registers for Torque Mode are listed in the chart below: Special M Control Setting Special M Description M1040 Power ON Special M Status Special M Description M1056 Power ON ready…
• Page 513
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series M1002 D1060 ON only for 1scan a Set control mode (0:V) M1000 Normally open contact Power on delay Power on delay Ready K1000 TORQ K100 Set Torque TORQ K-200 K1000 Set Torque Ready Power on…
• Page 514
  (MI=44 is for reverse run limit, MI=45 is for forward run limit and MI=46 is for homing to origin point). C2000 series AC motor drive only supports Z phase homing to origin point, please choose an Encoder with Z phase.
• Page 515
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series When setting D1060 = 3, AC motor drive is in homing mode. When setting M1040 = 1, AC motor drive power turns ON. When setting M1055=1, AC motor drive search for origin point. When homing is complete, M1070 will be ON. Then set D1060=1 to switch control mode to position mode.
• Page 516
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Part III (Point to Point Position Control): Switch control mode to Position Mode (D1060=1) and motor will be running forward and reverse between the position setting(+300000 ~ -300000 ). P2P mode M101 D1060 P2P mode…
• Page 517
  CANopen communication. This communication protocol is available for C2000 series and CT2000 series AC motor drives only and the way it functions is similar to Master/Slave control. A master drive could control a maximum of 8 slaves and the master/slave setting process is very simple.
• Page 518
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series 16-95…
• Page 519
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series PLC Programming for Master Drive Control In PLC program, D1110 is used for assigning the slave drive user wishes to control. The range setting for D1110 is 1~8 (if D1110 is set to 0 slave 8 is assigned).
• Page 520
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Special D Description Slave 2, …, bit7= Slave Description Special D Definition Definition Definition Frequency Attained Position Attained Torque Attained Homing Completed Forward Run Forward Run Forward Run Forward Run Reverse Run Reverse Run…
• Page 521
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series Diagram 2: When Slave 1 on-line status is detected, it will delay for 3 seconds before control command is enabled. M700 D1121 MOVP Node 0 online Internal node control mode Enable Control Delay ( M100 )
• Page 522
  Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series 16-11 Counting Function via MI8 The Multi-function Input Terminal (MI8) can be used for single direction Pulse counting and provides a maximum speed of 100K. To initiate MI8 for counting, simply set M1038 to ON and the count value will be saved to D1054 and D1055 in 32bit signed decimal.
• Page 523
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series Chapter 17 How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive 17-1 Capacity formula 17-2 General Precautions 17-3 How to choose a suitable motor The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence on its lifetime.
• Page 524
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 17-1 Capacity Formulas When one AC motor drive operates one motor The starting capacity should be less than 1.5x rated capacity of AC motor drive The starting capacity= ⎛ ⎞ × ⎜ ⎜…
• Page 525
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 2.3 When it is running continuously The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive(kVA) The requirement of load capacity= × ≤ capacity motor drive η ϕ…
• Page 526
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 17-2 General Precaution Selection Note 1. When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer (600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents may occur in the power input circuit and the converter section may be damaged.
• Page 527
  Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series 17-3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor Standard motor When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3-phase induction motor, take the following precautions: 1. The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor.
• Page 528
  3. Explosion-proof (Ex) motor: Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the (Ex) requirements. Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for (Ex) areas with special precautions. 4. Gear reduction motor: The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation will be different and depending on brand.
• Page 529
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C2000 Series Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives 18-1 Maintenance and Inspections 18-2 Greasy Dirt Problem 18-3 Fiber Dust Problem 18-4 Erosion Problem 18-5 Industrial Dust Problem…
• Page 530
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C2000 Series 18-1 Maintenance and Inspections Before the check-up, always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover. Wait at least 10 minutes after all display lamps have gone out, and then confirm that the capacitors have fully discharged by measuring the voltage between DC+ and DC-.
• Page 531
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C2000 Series Main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Half Daily Year Year ○ If there are any loose or missing screws Tighten or replace the screw…
• Page 532
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C2000 Series Transformer and reactor of main circuit Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Half Daily Year Year If there is any abnormal vibration or peculiar Visual, aural inspection and ○…
• Page 533
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C2000 Series Ventilation channel of cooling system Maintenance Period Check Items Methods and Criterion Half Daily Year Year ○ If there is any obstruction in the heat sink, air…
• Page 534
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C2000 Series 18-2 Greasy Dirt Problem Serious greasy dirt problems generally occur in processing industries such as machine tools, punching machines and so on. Please be aware of the possible damages that greasy oil may cause…
• Page 535
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C2000 Series 18-3 Fiber Dust Problem Serious fiber dust problems generally occur in the textile industry. Please be aware of the possible damages that fiber may cause to your drives: Fiber that accumulates or adheres to the fans will lead to poor ventilation and cause overheating problems.
• Page 536
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C2000 Series 18-4 Erosion Problem Erosion problems may occur if any fluids flow into the drives. Please be aware of the damages that erosion may cause to your drive.
• Page 537
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C2000 Series 18-5 Industrial Dust Problem Serious industrial dust pollution frequently occurs in stone processing plants, flour mills, cement plants, and so on. Please be aware of the possible damage that industrial dust may cause to your…
• Page 538
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C2000 Series 18-6 Wiring and Installation Problem When wiring the drive, the most common problem is wrong wire installation or poor wiring. Please be aware of the possible damages that poor wiring may cause to your drives: Screws are not fully fastened.
• Page 539
  Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C2000 Series 18-7 Multi-function Input/Output Terminals Problem Multi-function input/output terminal errors are generally caused by over usage of terminals and not following specifications. Please be aware of the possible damages that errors on multi-function input/output terminals may cause to your drives: Input/output circuit may burns out when the terminal usage exceeds its limit.